mirror of https://github.com/tLDP/LDP
7039 lines
324 KiB
XML
7039 lines
324 KiB
XML
<sect1 id="Services">
|
||
|
||
<title>Services</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="Services">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="Database">
|
||
|
||
<title>Database</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Most databases are supported under Linux, including Oracle, DB2, Sybase, Informix, MySQL, PostgreSQL,
|
||
InterBase and Paradox. Databases, and the Structures Query Language they work with, are complex, and this
|
||
chapter has neither the space or depth to deal with them. Read the next section on PHP to learn how to set
|
||
a dynamically generated Web portal in about five minutes.
|
||
|
||
We'll be using MySQL because it's extremely fast, capable of handling large databases (200G databases aren't
|
||
unheard of), and has recently been made open source. It also works well with PHP. While currently
|
||
lacking transaction support (due to speed concerns), a future version of MySQL will have this opt
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
* Connecting to MS SQL 6.x+ via Openlink/PHP/ODBC mini-HOWTO
|
||
|
||
* Sybase Adaptive Server Anywhere for Linux HOWTO
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="Database">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="DHCP">
|
||
|
||
<title>DHCP</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Endeavouring to maintain static IP addressing to maintain static IP addressing
|
||
information, such as IP addresses, subnet masks, DNS names and other
|
||
information on client machines can be difficult. Documentation becomes lost or
|
||
out-of-date, and network reconfigurations require details to be modified
|
||
manually on every machine.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) solves this problem by providing
|
||
arbitrary information (including IP addressing) to clients upon request.
|
||
Almost all client OSes support it and it is standard in most large networks.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
The impact that it has is most prevalent it eases network administration,
|
||
especially in large networks or networks which have lots of mobile users.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
2. DHCP protocol
|
||
|
||
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol), is used to control
|
||
vital networking parameters of hosts (running clients) with the help
|
||
of a server. DHCP is backward compatible with BOOTP. For more
|
||
information see RFC 2131 (old RFC 1541) and other. (See Internet
|
||
Resources section at the end of the document). You can also read
|
||
[32]http://web.syr.edu/~jmwobus/comfaqs/dhcp.faq.html.
|
||
|
||
4.5. Other interesting documents
|
||
|
||
Linux Magazine has a pretty good article in their April issue called
|
||
[62]Network Nirvana: How to make Network Configuration as easy as DHCP
|
||
that discusses the set up for DHCP.
|
||
|
||
References
|
||
|
||
1. DHCP.html#AEN17
|
||
2. DHCP.html#AEN19
|
||
3. DHCP.html#AEN24
|
||
4. DHCP.html#AEN41
|
||
5. DHCP.html#AEN45
|
||
6. DHCP.html#AEN64
|
||
7. DHCP.html#AEN69
|
||
8. DHCP.html#AEN74
|
||
9. DHCP.html#AEN77
|
||
10. DHCP.html#SLACKWARE
|
||
11. DHCP.html#REDHAT6
|
||
12. DHCP.html#AEN166
|
||
13. DHCP.html#AEN183
|
||
14. DHCP.html#DEBIAN
|
||
15. DHCP.html#AEN230
|
||
16. DHCP.html#NAMESERVER
|
||
17. DHCP.html#AEN293
|
||
18. DHCP.html#TROUBLESHOOTING
|
||
19. DHCP.html#AEN355
|
||
20. DHCP.html#AEN369
|
||
21. DHCP.html#DHCPSERVER
|
||
22. DHCP.html#AEN382
|
||
23. DHCP.html#AEN403
|
||
24. DHCP.html#AEN422
|
||
25. DHCP.html#AEN440
|
||
26. http://www.oswg.org/oswg-nightly/DHCP.html
|
||
27. http://www.linux.org.tw/CLDP/mini/DHCP.html
|
||
28. http://www.linux.or.jp/JF/JFdocs/DHCP.html
|
||
29. ftp://cuates.pue.upaep.mx/pub/linux/LuCAS/DHCP-mini-Como/
|
||
30. mailto:vuksan-feedback@veus.hr
|
||
31. http://www.opencontent.org/opl.shtml
|
||
32. http://web.syr.edu/~jmwobus/comfaqs/dhcp.faq.html
|
||
33. mailto:sergei@phystech.com
|
||
34. ftp://ftp.phystech.com/pub/
|
||
35. http://www.cps.msu.edu/~dunham/out/
|
||
36. ftp://metalab.unc.edu/pub/Linux/system/network/daemons
|
||
37. ftp://ftp.phystech.com/pub/
|
||
38. DHCP.html#NAMESERVER
|
||
39. DHCP.html#LINUXPPC-RH6
|
||
40. mailto:alexander.stevenson@home.com
|
||
41. DHCP.html#NAMESERVER
|
||
42. ftp://ftp.redhat.com/pub/redhat/redhat-4.2/i386/RedHat/RPMS/dhcpcd-0.6-2.i386.rpm
|
||
43. DHCP.html#SLACKWARE
|
||
44. mailto:nothing@cc.gatech.edu
|
||
45. DHCP.html#NAMESERVER
|
||
46. http://ftp.debian.org/debian/dists/slink/main/binary-i386/net/
|
||
47. DHCP.html#SLACKWARE
|
||
48. mailto:heiko@os.inf.tu-dresden.de
|
||
49. DHCP.html#NAMESERVER
|
||
50. DHCP.html#REDHAT6
|
||
51. ftp://ftp.linuxppc.org/
|
||
52. ftp://ftp.phystech.com/pub/dhcpcd-1.3.17-pl9.tar.gz
|
||
53. DHCP.html#TROUBLESHOOTING
|
||
54. mailto:nothing@cc.gatech.edu
|
||
55. DHCP.html#ERROR3
|
||
56. ftp://vanbuer.ddns.org/pub/
|
||
57. DHCP.html#DHCPSERVER
|
||
58. mailto:mellon@isc.org
|
||
59. ftp://ftp.isc.org/isc/dhcp/
|
||
60. http://www.kde.org/
|
||
61. ftp://ftp.us.kde.org/pub/kde/unstable/apps/network/
|
||
62. http://www.linux-mag.com/2000-04/networknirvana_01.html
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="DHCP">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="DNS">
|
||
|
||
<title>DNS</title>
|
||
|
||
|
||
Setting Up Your New Domain Mini-HOWTO.
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="DNS">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="FTP">
|
||
|
||
<title>FTP</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
File Transport Protocol (FTP) is an efficient way to transfer files between
|
||
machines across networks and clients and servers exist for almost all platforms
|
||
making FTP the most convenient (and therefore popular) method of transferring
|
||
files. FTP was first developed by the University of California, Berkeley for
|
||
inclusion in 4.2BSD (Berkeley Unix). The RFC (Request for Comments)
|
||
documents for the protocol is now known as RFC 959 and is available at
|
||
ftp://nic.merit.edu/documents/rfc/rfc0959.txt.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
There are two typical modes of running an FTP server - either anonymously or
|
||
account-based. Anonymous FTP servers are by far the most popular; they allow
|
||
any machine to access the FTP server and the files stored on it with the same
|
||
permissions. No usernames or passwords are transmitted down the wire.
|
||
Account-based FTP allows users to login with real usernames and passwords.
|
||
While it provides greater access control than anonymous FTP, transmitting real
|
||
usernames and password unencrypted over the Internet is generally avoided for
|
||
security reasons.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
An FTP client is the userland application that provides access to FTP
|
||
servers. There are many FTP clients available. Some are graphical, and
|
||
some are text-based.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
* FTP HOWTO
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="FTP">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="LDAP">
|
||
|
||
<title>LDAP</title>
|
||
|
||
Information about installing, configuring, running and maintaining a LDAP
|
||
(Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) Server on a Linux machine is
|
||
presented on this section. This section also presents details about how to
|
||
create LDAP databases, how to add, how to update and how to delete
|
||
information on the directory. This paper is mostly based on the University of
|
||
Michigan LDAP information pages and on the OpenLDAP Administrator's Guide.
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="LDAP">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="NFS">
|
||
|
||
<title>NFS</title>
|
||
|
||
NFS (Network File System)
|
||
|
||
The TCP/IP suite's equivalent of file sharing. This protocol operates at the Process/Application
|
||
layer of the DOD model, similar to the application layer of the OSI model.
|
||
|
||
SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol) and PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol)
|
||
|
||
Two protocols commonly used for dial-up access to the Internet. They are typically used with
|
||
TCP/IP; while SLIP works only with TCP/IP, PPP can be used with other protocols.
|
||
|
||
SLIP was the first protocol for dial-up Internet access. It opeates at the physical layer of the
|
||
OSI model, and provides a simple interface to a UNIX or other dial-up host for Internet access.
|
||
SLIP does not provide security, so authentication is handled through prompts before initiating
|
||
the SLIP connection.
|
||
|
||
PPP is a more recent development. It operates at the physical and data link layers of the OSI
|
||
model. In addition to the features of SLIP, PPP supports data compression, security (authentication),
|
||
and error control. PPP can also dynamically assign network addresses.
|
||
|
||
Since PPP provides easier authentication and better security, it should be used for dial-up connections
|
||
whenever possible. However, you may need to use SLIRP to communicate with dial-up servers (particularly
|
||
older UNIC machines and dedicated hardware servers) that don't support PPP.
|
||
|
||
> Start Config-HOWTO
|
||
|
||
2.15. Automount Points
|
||
|
||
If you don't like the mounting/unmounting thing, consider using autofs(5). You tell the autofs daemon what to automount and where starting with a file, /etc/auto.master. Its structure is simple:
|
||
|
||
|
||
/misc/etc/auto.misc
|
||
/mnt/etc/auto.mnt
|
||
|
||
In this example you tell autofs to automount media in /misc and /mnt, while the mountpoints are specified in/etc/auto.misc and /etc/auto.mnt. An example of /etc/auto.misc:
|
||
|
||
|
||
# an NFS export
|
||
server -romy.buddy.net:/pub/export
|
||
# removable media
|
||
cdrom -fstype=iso9660,ro:/dev/hdb
|
||
floppy-fstype=auto:/dev/fd0
|
||
|
||
Start the automounter. From now on, whenever you try to access the inexistent mount point /misc/cdrom, il will be created and the CD-ROM will be mounted.
|
||
|
||
>End Config-HOWTO
|
||
|
||
5.4. Unix Environment
|
||
|
||
The preferred way to share files in a Unix networking environment is
|
||
through NFS. NFS stands for Network File Sharing and it is a protocol
|
||
originally developed by Sun Microsystems. It is a way to share files
|
||
between machines as if they were local. A client "mounts" a filesystem
|
||
"exported" by an NFS server. The mounted filesystem will appear to the
|
||
client machine as if it was part of the local filesystem.
|
||
|
||
It is possible to mount the root filesystem at startup time, thus
|
||
allowing diskless clients to boot up and access all files from a
|
||
server. In other words, it is possible to have a fully functional
|
||
computer without a hard disk.
|
||
|
||
Coda is a network filesystem (like NFS) that supports disconnected
|
||
operation, persistant caching, among other goodies. It's included in
|
||
2.2.x kernels. Really handy for slow or unreliable networks and
|
||
laptops.
|
||
|
||
NFS-related documents:
|
||
|
||
<20> http://metalab.unc.edu/mdw/HOWTO/mini/NFS-Root.html
|
||
|
||
<20> http://metalab.unc.edu/mdw/HOWTO/Diskless-HOWTO.html
|
||
|
||
<20> http://metalab.unc.edu/mdw/HOWTO/mini/NFS-Root-Client-mini-
|
||
HOWTO/index.html
|
||
|
||
<20> http://www.redhat.com/support/docs/rhl/NFS-Tips/NFS-Tips.html
|
||
|
||
<20> http://metalab.unc.edu/mdw/HOWTO/NFS-HOWTO.html
|
||
|
||
CODA can be found at: http://www.coda.cs.cmu.edu/
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
5.4. Unix Environment
|
||
|
||
The preferred way to share files in a Unix networking environment is
|
||
through NFS. NFS stands for Network File Sharing and it is a protocol
|
||
originally developed by Sun Microsystems. It is a way to share files
|
||
between machines as if they were local. A client "mounts" a filesystem
|
||
"exported" by an NFS server. The mounted filesystem will appear to the
|
||
client machine as if it was part of the local filesystem.
|
||
|
||
It is possible to mount the root filesystem at startup time, thus
|
||
allowing diskless clients to boot up and access all files from a
|
||
server. In other words, it is possible to have a fully functional
|
||
computer without a hard disk.
|
||
|
||
Coda is a network filesystem (like NFS) that supports disconnected
|
||
operation, persistant caching, among other goodies. It's included in
|
||
2.2.x kernels. Really handy for slow or unreliable networks and
|
||
laptops.
|
||
|
||
NFS-related documents:
|
||
|
||
<20> http://metalab.unc.edu/mdw/HOWTO/mini/NFS-Root.html
|
||
|
||
<20> http://metalab.unc.edu/mdw/HOWTO/Diskless-HOWTO.html
|
||
|
||
<20> http://metalab.unc.edu/mdw/HOWTO/mini/NFS-Root-Client-mini-
|
||
HOWTO/index.html
|
||
|
||
<20> http://www.redhat.com/support/docs/rhl/NFS-Tips/NFS-Tips.html
|
||
|
||
<20> http://metalab.unc.edu/mdw/HOWTO/NFS-HOWTO.html
|
||
|
||
CODA can be found at: http://www.coda.cs.cmu.edu/
|
||
|
||
Samba is the Linux implementation of SMB under Linux. NFS is the Unix equivalent - a way to import and
|
||
export local files to and from remote machines. Like SMB, NFS sends information including user
|
||
passwords unencrypted, is its best to limit it to within your local network.
|
||
|
||
As you know, all storage in Linux is visible within a single tree structure, and new hard disks,
|
||
CD-ROMs, Zip drives and other spaces are mounted on a particular directory. NFS shares are also
|
||
attached to the system in this manner. NFS is included in most Linux kernels, and the tools
|
||
necessary to be an NFS server and client come in most distributions.
|
||
|
||
However, users of Linux kernel 2.2 hoping to use NFS may wish to upgrade to
|
||
kernel 2.4; while the earlier version of Linux NFS did work well, it was far slower than
|
||
most other Unix implementations of this protocol.
|
||
|
||
>Start Config-HOWTO
|
||
2.15. Automount Points
|
||
|
||
If you don't like the mounting/unmounting thing, consider using autofs(5). You tell the autofs daemon what to automount and where starting with a file, /etc/auto.master. Its structure is simple:
|
||
|
||
|
||
/misc/etc/auto.misc
|
||
/mnt/etc/auto.mnt
|
||
|
||
In this example you tell autofs to automount media in /misc and /mnt, while the mountpoints are specified in/etc/auto.misc and /etc/auto.mnt. An example of /etc/auto.misc:
|
||
|
||
|
||
# an NFS export
|
||
server -romy.buddy.net:/pub/export
|
||
# removable media
|
||
cdrom -fstype=iso9660,ro:/dev/hdb
|
||
floppy-fstype=auto:/dev/fd0
|
||
|
||
Start the automounter. From now on, whenever you try to access the inexistent mount point /misc/cdrom, il will be created and the CD-ROM will be mounted.
|
||
>End Config-HOWTO
|
||
|
||
> Linux NFS-HOWTO
|
||
> NFS-Root mini-HOWTO
|
||
> NFS-Root-Client Mini-HOWTO
|
||
> The Linux NIS(YP)/NYS/NIS+ HOWTO
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
Linux NFS-HOWTO
|
||
|
||
Tavis Barr
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD>tavis dot barr at liu dot edu
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD>
|
||
|
||
Nicolai Langfeldt
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD>janl at linpro dot no
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD>
|
||
|
||
Seth Vidal
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD>skvidal at phy dot duke dot edu
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD>
|
||
|
||
Tom McNeal
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD>trmcneal at attbi dot com
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD>
|
||
|
||
2002-08-25
|
||
Revision History
|
||
Revision v3.1 2002-08-25 Revised by: tavis
|
||
Typo in firewalling section in 3.0
|
||
Revision v3.0 2002-07-16 Revised by: tavis
|
||
Updates plus additions to performance, security
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
Table of Contents
|
||
1. Preamble
|
||
1.1. Legal stuff
|
||
1.2. Disclaimer
|
||
1.3. Feedback
|
||
1.4. Translation
|
||
1.5. Dedication
|
||
|
||
|
||
2. Introduction
|
||
2.1. What is NFS?
|
||
2.2. What is this HOWTO and what is it not?
|
||
2.3. Knowledge Pre-Requisites
|
||
2.4. Software Pre-Requisites: Kernel Version and nfs-utils
|
||
2.5. Where to get help and further information
|
||
|
||
|
||
3. Setting Up an NFS Server
|
||
3.1. Introduction to the server setup
|
||
3.2. Setting up the Configuration Files
|
||
3.3. Getting the services started
|
||
3.4. Verifying that NFS is running
|
||
3.5. Making changes to /etc/exports later on
|
||
|
||
|
||
4. Setting up an NFS Client
|
||
4.1. Mounting remote directories
|
||
4.2. Getting NFS File Systems to Be Mounted at Boot Time
|
||
4.3. Mount options
|
||
|
||
|
||
5. Optimizing NFS Performance
|
||
5.1. Setting Block Size to Optimize Transfer Speeds
|
||
5.2. Packet Size and Network Drivers
|
||
5.3. Overflow of Fragmented Packets
|
||
5.4. NFS over TCP
|
||
5.5. Timeout and Retransmission Values
|
||
5.6. Number of Instances of the NFSD Server Daemon
|
||
5.7. Memory Limits on the Input Queue
|
||
5.8. Turning Off Autonegotiation of NICs and Hubs
|
||
5.9. Synchronous vs. Asynchronous Behavior in NFS
|
||
5.10. Non-NFS-Related Means of Enhancing Server Performance
|
||
|
||
|
||
6. Security and NFS
|
||
6.1. The portmapper
|
||
6.2. Server security: nfsd and mountd
|
||
6.3. Client Security
|
||
6.4. NFS and firewalls (ipchains and netfilter)
|
||
6.5. Tunneling NFS through SSH
|
||
6.6. Summary
|
||
|
||
|
||
7. Troubleshooting
|
||
7.1. Unable to See Files on a Mounted File System
|
||
7.2. File requests hang or timeout waiting for access to the file.
|
||
7.3. Unable to mount a file system
|
||
7.4. I do not have permission to access files on the mounted volume.
|
||
7.5. When I transfer really big files, NFS takes over all the CPU cycles
|
||
on the server and it screeches to a halt.
|
||
7.6. Strange error or log messages
|
||
7.7. Real permissions don't match what's in /etc/exports.
|
||
7.8. Flaky and unreliable behavior
|
||
7.9. nfsd won't start
|
||
7.10. File Corruption When Using Multiple Clients
|
||
|
||
|
||
8. Using Linux NFS with Other OSes
|
||
8.1. AIX
|
||
8.2. BSD
|
||
8.3. Tru64 Unix
|
||
8.4. HP-UX
|
||
8.5. IRIX
|
||
8.6. Solaris
|
||
8.7. SunOS
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
1. Preamble
|
||
|
||
1.1. Legal stuff
|
||
|
||
Copyright (c) <2002> by Tavis Barr, Nicolai Langfeldt, Seth Vidal, and Tom
|
||
McNeal. This material may be distributed only subject to the terms and
|
||
conditions set forth in the Open Publication License, v1.0 or later (the
|
||
latest version is presently available at [http://www.opencontent.org/openpub
|
||
/] http://www.opencontent.org/openpub/).
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
1.2. Disclaimer
|
||
|
||
This document is provided without any guarantees, including merchantability
|
||
or fitness for a particular use. The maintainers cannot be responsible if
|
||
following instructions in this document leads to damaged equipment or data,
|
||
angry neighbors, strange habits, divorce, or any other calamity.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
1.3. Feedback
|
||
|
||
This will never be a finished document; we welcome feedback about how it can
|
||
be improved. As of February 2002, the Linux NFS home page is being hosted at
|
||
[http://nfs.sourceforge.net] http://nfs.sourceforge.net. Check there for
|
||
mailing lists, bug fixes, and updates, and also to verify who currently
|
||
maintains this document.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
1.4. Translation
|
||
|
||
If you are able to translate this document into another language, we would be
|
||
grateful and we will also do our best to assist you. Please notify the
|
||
maintainers.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
1.5. Dedication
|
||
|
||
NFS on Linux was made possible by a collaborative effort of many people, but
|
||
a few stand out for special recognition. The original version was developed
|
||
by Olaf Kirch and Alan Cox. The version 3 server code was solidified by Neil
|
||
Brown, based on work from Saadia Khan, James Yarbrough, Allen Morris, H.J.
|
||
Lu, and others (including himself). The client code was written by Olaf Kirch
|
||
and updated by Trond Myklebust. The version 4 lock manager was developed by
|
||
Saadia Khan. Dave Higgen and H.J. Lu both have undertaken the thankless job
|
||
of extensive maintenance and bug fixes to get the code to actually work the
|
||
way it was supposed to. H.J. has also done extensive development of the
|
||
nfs-utils package. Of course this dedication is leaving many people out.
|
||
|
||
The original version of this document was developed by Nicolai Langfeldt. It
|
||
was heavily rewritten in 2000 by Tavis Barr and Seth Vidal to reflect
|
||
substantial changes in the workings of NFS for Linux developed between the
|
||
2.0 and 2.4 kernels. It was edited again in February 2002, when Tom McNeal
|
||
made substantial additions to the performance section. Thomas Emmel, Neil
|
||
Brown, Trond Myklebust, Erez Zadok, and Ion Badulescu also provided valuable
|
||
comments and contributions.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
2. Introduction
|
||
|
||
2.1. What is NFS?
|
||
|
||
The Network File System (NFS) was developed to allow machines to mount a disk
|
||
partition on a remote machine as if it were on a local hard drive. This
|
||
allows for fast, seamless sharing of files across a network.
|
||
|
||
It also gives the potential for unwanted people to access your hard drive
|
||
over the network (and thereby possibly read your email and delete all your
|
||
files as well as break into your system) if you set it up incorrectly. So
|
||
please read the Security section of this document carefully if you intend to
|
||
implement an NFS setup.
|
||
|
||
There are other systems that provide similar functionality to NFS. Samba
|
||
([http://www.samba.org] http://www.samba.org) provides file services to
|
||
Windows clients. The Andrew File System from IBM ([http://www.transarc.com/
|
||
Product/EFS/AFS/index.html] http://www.transarc.com/Product/EFS/AFS/
|
||
index.html), recently open-sourced, provides a file sharing mechanism with
|
||
some additional security and performance features. The Coda File System
|
||
([http://www.coda.cs.cmu.edu/] http://www.coda.cs.cmu.edu/) is still in
|
||
development as of this writing but is designed to work well with disconnected
|
||
clients. Many of the features of the Andrew and Coda file systems are slated
|
||
for inclusion in the next version of NFS (Version 4) ([http://www.nfsv4.org]
|
||
http://www.nfsv4.org). The advantage of NFS today is that it is mature,
|
||
standard, well understood, and supported robustly across a variety of
|
||
platforms.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
2.2. What is this HOWTO and what is it not?
|
||
|
||
This HOWTO is intended as a complete, step-by-step guide to setting up NFS
|
||
correctly and effectively. Setting up NFS involves two steps, namely
|
||
configuring the server and then configuring the client. Each of these steps
|
||
is dealt with in order. The document then offers some tips for people with
|
||
particular needs and hardware setups, as well as security and troubleshooting
|
||
advice.
|
||
|
||
This HOWTO is not a description of the guts and underlying structure of NFS.
|
||
For that you may wish to read Linux NFS and Automounter Administration by
|
||
Erez Zadok (Sybex, 2001). The classic NFS book, updated and still quite
|
||
useful, is Managing NFS and NIS by Hal Stern, published by O'Reilly &
|
||
Associates, Inc. A much more advanced technical description of NFS is
|
||
available in NFS Illustrated by Brent Callaghan.
|
||
|
||
This document is also not intended as a complete reference manual, and does
|
||
not contain an exhaustive list of the features of Linux NFS. For that, you
|
||
can look at the man pages for nfs(5), exports(5), mount(8), fstab(5), nfsd(8)
|
||
, lockd(8), statd(8), rquotad(8), and mountd(8).
|
||
|
||
It will also not cover PC-NFS, which is considered obsolete (users are
|
||
encouraged to use Samba to share files with Windows machines) or NFS Version
|
||
4, which is still in development.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
2.3. Knowledge Pre-Requisites
|
||
|
||
You should know some basic things about TCP/IP networking before reading this
|
||
HOWTO; if you are in doubt, read the Networking- Overview-HOWTO.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
2.4. Software Pre-Requisites: Kernel Version and nfs-utils
|
||
|
||
The difference between Version 2 NFS and version 3 NFS will be explained
|
||
later on; for now, you might simply take the suggestion that you will need
|
||
NFS Version 3 if you are installing a dedicated or high-volume file server.
|
||
NFS Version 2 should be fine for casual use.
|
||
|
||
NFS Version 2 has been around for quite some time now (at least since the 1.2
|
||
kernel series) however you will need a kernel version of at least 2.2.18 if
|
||
you wish to do any of the following:
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>Mix Linux NFS with other operating systems' NFS
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>Use file locking reliably over NFS
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>Use NFS Version 3.
|
||
|
||
|
||
There are also patches available for kernel versions above 2.2.14 that
|
||
provide the above functionality. Some of them can be downloaded from the
|
||
Linux NFS homepage. If your kernel version is 2.2.14- 2.2.17 and you have the
|
||
source code on hand, you can tell if these patches have been added because
|
||
NFS Version 3 server support will be a configuration option. However, unless
|
||
you have some particular reason to use an older kernel, you should upgrade
|
||
because many bugs have been fixed along the way. Kernel 2.2.19 contains some
|
||
additional locking improvements over 2.2.18.
|
||
|
||
Version 3 functionality will also require the nfs-utils package of at least
|
||
version 0.1.6, and mount version 2.10m or newer. However because nfs-utils
|
||
and mount are fully backwards compatible, and because newer versions have
|
||
lots of security and bug fixes, there is no good reason not to install the
|
||
newest nfs-utils and mount packages if you are beginning an NFS setup.
|
||
|
||
All 2.4 and higher kernels have full NFS Version 3 functionality.
|
||
|
||
In all cases, if you are building your own kernel, you will need to select
|
||
NFS and NFS Version 3 support at compile time. Most (but not all) standard
|
||
distributions come with kernels that support NFS version 3.
|
||
|
||
Handling files larger than 2 GB will require a 2.4x kernel and a 2.2.x
|
||
version of glibc.
|
||
|
||
All kernels after 2.2.18 support NFS over TCP on the client side. As of this
|
||
writing, server-side NFS over TCP only exists in a buggy form as an
|
||
experimental option in the post-2.2.18 series; patches for 2.4 and 2.5
|
||
kernels have been introduced starting with 2.4.17 and 2.5.6. The patches are
|
||
believed to be stable, though as of this writing they are relatively new and
|
||
have not seen widespread use or integration into the mainstream 2.4 kernel.
|
||
|
||
Because so many of the above functionalities were introduced in kernel
|
||
version 2.2.18, this document was written to be consistent with kernels above
|
||
this version (including 2.4.x). If you have an older kernel, this document
|
||
may not describe your NFS system correctly.
|
||
|
||
As we write this document, NFS version 4 has only recently been finalized as
|
||
a protocol, and no implementations are considered production-ready. It will
|
||
not be dealt with here.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
2.5. Where to get help and further information
|
||
|
||
As of November 2000, the Linux NFS homepage is at [http://
|
||
nfs.sourceforge.net] http://nfs.sourceforge.net. Please check there for NFS
|
||
related mailing lists as well as the latest version of nfs-utils, NFS kernel
|
||
patches, and other NFS related packages.
|
||
|
||
When you encounter a problem or have a question not covered in this manual,
|
||
the faq or the man pages, you should send a message to the nfs mailing list
|
||
(<nfs@lists.sourceforge.net>). To best help the developers and other users
|
||
help you assess your problem you should include:
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>the version of nfs-utils you are using
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>the version of the kernel and any non-stock applied kernels.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>the distribution of linux you are using
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>the version(s) of other operating systems involved.
|
||
|
||
|
||
It is also useful to know the networking configuration connecting the hosts.
|
||
|
||
If your problem involves the inability mount or export shares please also
|
||
include:
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>a copy of your /etc/exports file
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>the output of rpcinfo -p localhost run on the server
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>the output of rpcinfo -p servername run on the client
|
||
|
||
|
||
Sending all of this information with a specific question, after reading all
|
||
the documentation, is the best way to ensure a helpful response from the
|
||
list.
|
||
|
||
You may also wish to look at the man pages for nfs(5), exports(5), mount(8),
|
||
fstab(5), nfsd(8), lockd(8), statd(8), rquotad(8), and mountd(8).
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
3. Setting Up an NFS Server
|
||
|
||
3.1. Introduction to the server setup
|
||
|
||
It is assumed that you will be setting up both a server and a client. If you
|
||
are just setting up a client to work off of somebody else's server (say in
|
||
your department), you can skip to Section 4. However, every client that is
|
||
set up requires modifications on the server to authorize that client (unless
|
||
the server setup is done in a very insecure way), so even if you are not
|
||
setting up a server you may wish to read this section to get an idea what
|
||
kinds of authorization problems to look out for.
|
||
|
||
Setting up the server will be done in two steps: Setting up the configuration
|
||
files for NFS, and then starting the NFS services.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
3.2. Setting up the Configuration Files
|
||
|
||
There are three main configuration files you will need to edit to set up an
|
||
NFS server: /etc/exports, /etc/hosts.allow, and /etc/hosts.deny. Strictly
|
||
speaking, you only need to edit /etc/exports to get NFS to work, but you
|
||
would be left with an extremely insecure setup. You may also need to edit
|
||
your startup scripts; see Section 3.3.3 for more on that.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
3.2.1. /etc/exports
|
||
|
||
This file contains a list of entries; each entry indicates a volume that is
|
||
shared and how it is shared. Check the man pages (man exports) for a complete
|
||
description of all the setup options for the file, although the description
|
||
here will probably satistfy most people's needs.
|
||
|
||
An entry in /etc/exports will typically look like this:
|
||
directory machine1(option11,option12) machine2(option21,option22)
|
||
|
||
where
|
||
|
||
directory
|
||
the directory that you want to share. It may be an entire volume though
|
||
it need not be. If you share a directory, then all directories under it
|
||
within the same file system will be shared as well.
|
||
|
||
machine1 and machine2
|
||
client machines that will have access to the directory. The machines may
|
||
be listed by their DNS address or their IP address (e.g.,
|
||
machine.company.com or 192.168.0.8). Using IP addresses is more reliable
|
||
and more secure. If you need to use DNS addresses, and they do not seem
|
||
to be resolving to the right machine, see Section 7.3.
|
||
|
||
optionxx
|
||
the option listing for each machine will describe what kind of access
|
||
that machine will have. Important options are:
|
||
|
||
<20><>+<2B>ro: The directory is shared read only; the client machine will not be
|
||
able to write to it. This is the default.
|
||
|
||
<20><>+<2B>rw: The client machine will have read and write access to the
|
||
directory.
|
||
|
||
<20><>+<2B>no_root_squash: By default, any file request made by user root on the
|
||
client machine is treated as if it is made by user nobody on the
|
||
server. (Excatly which UID the request is mapped to depends on the
|
||
UID of user "nobody" on the server, not the client.) If
|
||
no_root_squash is selected, then root on the client machine will have
|
||
the same level of access to the files on the system as root on the
|
||
server. This can have serious security implications, although it may
|
||
be necessary if you want to perform any administrative work on the
|
||
client machine that involves the exported directories. You should not
|
||
specify this option without a good reason.
|
||
|
||
<20><>+<2B>no_subtree_check: If only part of a volume is exported, a routine
|
||
called subtree checking verifies that a file that is requested from
|
||
the client is in the appropriate part of the volume. If the entire
|
||
volume is exported, disabling this check will speed up transfers.
|
||
|
||
<20><>+<2B>sync: By default, all but the most recent version (version 1.11) of
|
||
the exportfs command will use async behavior, telling a client
|
||
machine that a file write is complete - that is, has been written to
|
||
stable storage - when NFS has finished handing the write over to the
|
||
filesysytem. This behavior may cause data corruption if the server
|
||
reboots, and the sync option prevents this. See Section 5.9 for a
|
||
complete discussion of sync and async behavior.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Suppose we have two client machines, slave1 and slave2, that have IP
|
||
addresses 192.168.0.1 and 192.168.0.2, respectively. We wish to share our
|
||
software binaries and home directories with these machines. A typical setup
|
||
for /etc/exports might look like this:
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
| /usr/local 192.168.0.1(ro) 192.168.0.2(ro) |
|
||
| /home 192.168.0.1(rw) 192.168.0.2(rw) |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|
||
Here we are sharing /usr/local read-only to slave1 and slave2, because it
|
||
probably contains our software and there may not be benefits to allowing
|
||
slave1 and slave2 to write to it that outweigh security concerns. On the
|
||
other hand, home directories need to be exported read-write if users are to
|
||
save work on them.
|
||
|
||
If you have a large installation, you may find that you have a bunch of
|
||
computers all on the same local network that require access to your server.
|
||
There are a few ways of simplifying references to large numbers of machines.
|
||
First, you can give access to a range of machines at once by specifying a
|
||
network and a netmask. For example, if you wanted to allow access to all the
|
||
machines with IP addresses between 192.168.0.0 and 192.168.0.255 then you
|
||
could have the entries:
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
| /usr/local 192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0(ro) |
|
||
| /home 192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0(rw) |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|
||
See the [http://www.linuxdoc.org/HOWTO/Networking-Overview-HOWTO.html]
|
||
Networking-Overview HOWTO for further information about how netmasks work,
|
||
and you may also wish to look at the man pages for init and hosts.allow.
|
||
|
||
Second, you can use NIS netgroups in your entry. To specify a netgroup in
|
||
your exports file, simply prepend the name of the netgroup with an "@". See
|
||
the [http://www.linuxdoc.org/HOWTO/NIS-HOWTO.html] NIS HOWTO for details on
|
||
how netgroups work.
|
||
|
||
Third, you can use wildcards such as *.foo.com or 192.168. instead of
|
||
hostnames. There were problems with wildcard implementation in the 2.2 kernel
|
||
series that were fixed in kernel 2.2.19.
|
||
|
||
However, you should keep in mind that any of these simplifications could
|
||
cause a security risk if there are machines in your netgroup or local network
|
||
that you do not trust completely.
|
||
|
||
A few cautions are in order about what cannot (or should not) be exported.
|
||
First, if a directory is exported, its parent and child directories cannot be
|
||
exported if they are in the same filesystem. However, exporting both should
|
||
not be necessary because listing the parent directory in the /etc/exports
|
||
file will cause all underlying directories within that file system to be
|
||
exported.
|
||
|
||
Second, it is a poor idea to export a FAT or VFAT (i.e., MS-DOS or Windows 95
|
||
/98) filesystem with NFS. FAT is not designed for use on a multi-user
|
||
machine, and as a result, operations that depend on permissions will not work
|
||
well. Moreover, some of the underlying filesystem design is reported to work
|
||
poorly with NFS's expectations.
|
||
|
||
Third, device or other special files may not export correctly to non-Linux
|
||
clients. See Section 8 for details on particular operating systems.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
3.2.2. /etc/hosts.allow and /etc/hosts.deny
|
||
|
||
These two files specify which computers on the network can use services on
|
||
your machine. Each line of the file contains a single entry listing a service
|
||
and a set of machines. When the server gets a request from a machine, it does
|
||
the following:
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>It first checks hosts.allow to see if the machine matches a description
|
||
listed in there. If it does, then the machine is allowed access.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>If the machine does not match an entry in hosts.allow, the server then
|
||
checks hosts.deny to see if the client matches a listing in there. If it
|
||
does then the machine is denied access.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>If the client matches no listings in either file, then it is allowed
|
||
access.
|
||
|
||
|
||
In addition to controlling access to services handled by inetd (such as
|
||
telnet and FTP), this file can also control access to NFS by restricting
|
||
connections to the daemons that provide NFS services. Restrictions are done
|
||
on a per-service basis.
|
||
|
||
The first daemon to restrict access to is the portmapper. This daemon
|
||
essentially just tells requesting clients how to find all the NFS services on
|
||
the system. Restricting access to the portmapper is the best defense against
|
||
someone breaking into your system through NFS because completely unauthorized
|
||
clients won't know where to find the NFS daemons. However, there are two
|
||
things to watch out for. First, restricting portmapper isn't enough if the
|
||
intruder already knows for some reason how to find those daemons. And second,
|
||
if you are running NIS, restricting portmapper will also restrict requests to
|
||
NIS. That should usually be harmless since you usually want to restrict NFS
|
||
and NIS in a similar way, but just be cautioned. (Running NIS is generally a
|
||
good idea if you are running NFS, because the client machines need a way of
|
||
knowing who owns what files on the exported volumes. Of course there are
|
||
other ways of doing this such as syncing password files. See the [http://
|
||
www.linuxdoc.org/HOWTO/NIS-HOWTO.html] NIS HOWTO for information on setting
|
||
up NIS.)
|
||
|
||
In general it is a good idea with NFS (as with most internet services) to
|
||
explicitly deny access to IP addresses that you don't need to allow access
|
||
to.
|
||
|
||
The first step in doing this is to add the followng entry to /etc/hosts.deny:
|
||
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
| portmap:ALL |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|
||
Starting with nfs-utils 0.2.0, you can be a bit more careful by controlling
|
||
access to individual daemons. It's a good precaution since an intruder will
|
||
often be able to weasel around the portmapper. If you have a newer version of
|
||
nfs-utils, add entries for each of the NFS daemons (see the next section to
|
||
find out what these daemons are; for now just put entries for them in
|
||
hosts.deny):
|
||
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
| lockd:ALL |
|
||
| mountd:ALL |
|
||
| rquotad:ALL |
|
||
| statd:ALL |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|
||
Even if you have an older version of nfs-utils, adding these entries is at
|
||
worst harmless (since they will just be ignored) and at best will save you
|
||
some trouble when you upgrade. Some sys admins choose to put the entry ALL:
|
||
ALL in the file /etc/hosts.deny, which causes any service that looks at these
|
||
files to deny access to all hosts unless it is explicitly allowed. While this
|
||
is more secure behavior, it may also get you in trouble when you are
|
||
installing new services, you forget you put it there, and you can't figure
|
||
out for the life of you why they won't work.
|
||
|
||
Next, we need to add an entry to hosts.allow to give any hosts access that we
|
||
want to have access. (If we just leave the above lines in hosts.deny then
|
||
nobody will have access to NFS.) Entries in hosts.allow follow the format
|
||
|
||
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
| service: host [or network/netmask] , host [or network/netmask] |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|
||
Here, host is IP address of a potential client; it may be possible in some
|
||
versions to use the DNS name of the host, but it is strongly discouraged.
|
||
|
||
Suppose we have the setup above and we just want to allow access to
|
||
slave1.foo.com and slave2.foo.com, and suppose that the IP addresses of these
|
||
machines are 192.168.0.1 and 192.168.0.2, respectively. We could add the
|
||
following entry to /etc/hosts.allow:
|
||
|
||
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
| portmap: 192.168.0.1 , 192.168.0.2 |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|
||
For recent nfs-utils versions, we would also add the following (again, these
|
||
entries are harmless even if they are not supported):
|
||
|
||
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
| lockd: 192.168.0.1 , 192.168.0.2 |
|
||
| rquotad: 192.168.0.1 , 192.168.0.2 |
|
||
| mountd: 192.168.0.1 , 192.168.0.2 |
|
||
| statd: 192.168.0.1 , 192.168.0.2 |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|
||
If you intend to run NFS on a large number of machines in a local network, /
|
||
etc/hosts.allow also allows for network/netmask style entries in the same
|
||
manner as /etc/exports above.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
3.3. Getting the services started
|
||
|
||
3.3.1. Pre-requisites
|
||
|
||
The NFS server should now be configured and we can start it running. First,
|
||
you will need to have the appropriate packages installed. This consists
|
||
mainly of a new enough kernel and a new enough version of the nfs-utils
|
||
package. See Section 2.4 if you are in doubt.
|
||
|
||
Next, before you can start NFS, you will need to have TCP/IP networking
|
||
functioning correctly on your machine. If you can use telnet, FTP, and so on,
|
||
then chances are your TCP networking is fine.
|
||
|
||
That said, with most recent Linux distributions you may be able to get NFS up
|
||
and running simply by rebooting your machine, and the startup scripts should
|
||
detect that you have set up your /etc/exports file and will start up NFS
|
||
correctly. If you try this, see Section 3.4 Verifying that NFS is running. If
|
||
this does not work, or if you are not in a position to reboot your machine,
|
||
then the following section will tell you which daemons need to be started in
|
||
order to run NFS services. If for some reason nfsd was already running when
|
||
you edited your configuration files above, you will have to flush your
|
||
configuration; see Section 3.5 for details.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
3.3.2. Starting the Portmapper
|
||
|
||
NFS depends on the portmapper daemon, either called portmap or rpc.portmap.
|
||
It will need to be started first. It should be located in /sbin but is
|
||
sometimes in /usr/sbin. Most recent Linux distributions start this daemon in
|
||
the boot scripts, but it is worth making sure that it is running before you
|
||
begin working with NFS (just type ps aux | grep portmap).
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
3.3.3. The Daemons
|
||
|
||
NFS serving is taken care of by five daemons: rpc.nfsd, which does most of
|
||
the work; rpc.lockd and rpc.statd, which handle file locking; rpc.mountd,
|
||
which handles the initial mount requests, and rpc.rquotad, which handles user
|
||
file quotas on exported volumes. Starting with 2.2.18, lockd is called by
|
||
nfsd upon demand, so you do not need to worry about starting it yourself.
|
||
statd will need to be started separately. Most recent Linux distributions
|
||
will have startup scripts for these daemons.
|
||
|
||
The daemons are all part of the nfs-utils package, and may be either in the /
|
||
sbin directory or the /usr/sbin directory.
|
||
|
||
If your distribution does not include them in the startup scripts, then then
|
||
you should add them, configured to start in the following order:
|
||
|
||
rpc.portmap
|
||
rpc.mountd, rpc.nfsd
|
||
rpc.statd, rpc.lockd (if necessary), and rpc.rquotad
|
||
|
||
The nfs-utils package has sample startup scripts for RedHat and Debian. If
|
||
you are using a different distribution, in general you can just copy the
|
||
RedHat script, but you will probably have to take out the line that says:
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
| . ../init.d/functions |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
to avoid getting error messages.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
3.4. Verifying that NFS is running
|
||
|
||
To do this, query the portmapper with the command rpcinfo -p to find out what
|
||
services it is providing. You should get something like this:
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
| program vers proto port |
|
||
| 100000 2 tcp 111 portmapper |
|
||
| 100000 2 udp 111 portmapper |
|
||
| 100011 1 udp 749 rquotad |
|
||
| 100011 2 udp 749 rquotad |
|
||
| 100005 1 udp 759 mountd |
|
||
| 100005 1 tcp 761 mountd |
|
||
| 100005 2 udp 764 mountd |
|
||
| 100005 2 tcp 766 mountd |
|
||
| 100005 3 udp 769 mountd |
|
||
| 100005 3 tcp 771 mountd |
|
||
| 100003 2 udp 2049 nfs |
|
||
| 100003 3 udp 2049 nfs |
|
||
| 300019 1 tcp 830 amd |
|
||
| 300019 1 udp 831 amd |
|
||
| 100024 1 udp 944 status |
|
||
| 100024 1 tcp 946 status |
|
||
| 100021 1 udp 1042 nlockmgr |
|
||
| 100021 3 udp 1042 nlockmgr |
|
||
| 100021 4 udp 1042 nlockmgr |
|
||
| 100021 1 tcp 1629 nlockmgr |
|
||
| 100021 3 tcp 1629 nlockmgr |
|
||
| 100021 4 tcp 1629 nlockmgr |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|
||
This says that we have NFS versions 2 and 3, rpc.statd version 1, network
|
||
lock manager (the service name for rpc.lockd) versions 1, 3, and 4. There are
|
||
also different service listings depending on whether NFS is travelling over
|
||
TCP or UDP. Linux systems use UDP by default unless TCP is explicitly
|
||
requested; however other OSes such as Solaris default to TCP.
|
||
|
||
If you do not at least see a line that says portmapper, a line that says nfs,
|
||
and a line that says mountd then you will need to backtrack and try again to
|
||
start up the daemons (see Section 7, Troubleshooting, if this still doesn't
|
||
work).
|
||
|
||
If you do see these services listed, then you should be ready to set up NFS
|
||
clients to access files from your server.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
3.5. Making changes to /etc/exports later on
|
||
|
||
If you come back and change your /etc/exports file, the changes you make may
|
||
not take effect immediately. You should run the command exportfs -ra to force
|
||
nfsd to re-read the /etc/exports <20> file. If you can't find the exportfs
|
||
command, then you can kill nfsd with the -HUP flag (see the man pages for
|
||
kill for details).
|
||
|
||
If that still doesn't work, don't forget to check hosts.allow to make sure
|
||
you haven't forgotten to list any new client machines there. Also check the
|
||
host listings on any firewalls you may have set up (see Section 7 and Section
|
||
6 for more details on firewalls and NFS).
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
4. Setting up an NFS Client
|
||
|
||
4.1. Mounting remote directories
|
||
|
||
Before beginning, you should double-check to make sure your mount program is
|
||
new enough (version 2.10m if you want to use Version 3 NFS), and that the
|
||
client machine supports NFS mounting, though most standard distributions do.
|
||
If you are using a 2.2 or later kernel with the /proc filesystem you can
|
||
check the latter by reading the file /proc/filesystems and making sure there
|
||
is a line containing nfs. If not, typing insmod nfs may make it magically
|
||
appear if NFS has been compiled as a module; otherwise, you will need to
|
||
build (or download) a kernel that has NFS support built in. In general,
|
||
kernels that do not have NFS compiled in will give a very specific error when
|
||
the mount command below is run.
|
||
|
||
To begin using machine as an NFS client, you will need the portmapper running
|
||
on that machine, and to use NFS file locking, you will also need rpc.statd
|
||
and rpc.lockd running on both the client and the server. Most recent
|
||
distributions start those services by default at boot time; if yours doesn't,
|
||
see Section 3.2 for information on how to start them up.
|
||
|
||
With portmap, lockd, and statd running, you should now be able to mount the
|
||
remote directory from your server just the way you mount a local hard drive,
|
||
with the mount command. Continuing our example from the previous section,
|
||
suppose our server above is called master.foo.com,and we want to mount the /
|
||
home directory on slave1.foo.com. Then, all we have to do, from the root
|
||
prompt on slave1.foo.com, is type:
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
| # mount master.foo.com:/home /mnt/home |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
and the directory /home on master will appear as the directory /mnt/home on
|
||
slave1. (Note that this assumes we have created the directory /mnt/home as an
|
||
empty mount point beforehand.)
|
||
|
||
If this does not work, see the Troubleshooting section (Section 7).
|
||
|
||
You can get rid of the file system by typing
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
| # umount /mnt/home |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
just like you would for a local file system.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
4.2. Getting NFS File Systems to Be Mounted at Boot Time
|
||
|
||
NFS file systems can be added to your /etc/fstab file the same way local file
|
||
systems can, so that they mount when your system starts up. The only
|
||
difference is that the file system type will be set to nfs and the dump and
|
||
fsck order (the last two entries) will have to be set to zero. So for our
|
||
example above, the entry in /etc/fstab would look like:
|
||
# device mountpoint fs-type options dump fsckorder
|
||
...
|
||
master.foo.com:/home /mnt nfs rw 0 0
|
||
...
|
||
|
||
|
||
See the man pages for fstab if you are unfamiliar with the syntax of this
|
||
file. If you are using an automounter such as amd or autofs, the options in
|
||
the corresponding fields of your mount listings should look very similar if
|
||
not identical.
|
||
|
||
At this point you should have NFS working, though a few tweaks may still be
|
||
necessary to get it to work well. You should also read Section 6 to be sure
|
||
your setup is reasonably secure.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
4.3. Mount options
|
||
|
||
4.3.1. Soft vs. Hard Mounting
|
||
|
||
There are some options you should consider adding at once. They govern the
|
||
way the NFS client handles a server crash or network outage. One of the cool
|
||
things about NFS is that it can handle this gracefully. If you set up the
|
||
clients right. There are two distinct failure modes:
|
||
|
||
soft
|
||
If a file request fails, the NFS client will report an error to the
|
||
process on the client machine requesting the file access. Some programs
|
||
can handle this with composure, most won't. We do not recommend using
|
||
this setting; it is a recipe for corrupted files and lost data. You
|
||
should especially not use this for mail disks --- if you value your mail,
|
||
that is.
|
||
|
||
hard
|
||
The program accessing a file on a NFS mounted file system will hang when
|
||
the server crashes. The process cannot be interrupted or killed (except
|
||
by a "sure kill") unless you also specify intr. When the NFS server is
|
||
back online the program will continue undisturbed from where it was. We
|
||
recommend using hard,intr on all NFS mounted file systems.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Picking up the from previous example, the fstab entry would now look like:
|
||
# device mountpoint fs-type options dump fsckord
|
||
...
|
||
master.foo.com:/home /mnt/home nfs rw,hard,intr 0 0
|
||
...
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
4.3.2. Setting Block Size to Optimize Transfer Speeds
|
||
|
||
The rsize and wsize mount options specify the size of the chunks of data that
|
||
the client and server pass back and forth to each other.
|
||
|
||
The defaults may be too big or to small; there is no size that works well on
|
||
all or most setups. On the one hand, some combinations of Linux kernels and
|
||
network cards (largely on older machines) cannot handle blocks that large. On
|
||
the other hand, if they can handle larger blocks, a bigger size might be
|
||
faster.
|
||
|
||
Getting the block size right is an important factor in performance and is a
|
||
must if you are planning to use the NFS server in a production environment.
|
||
See Section 5 for details.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
5. Optimizing NFS Performance
|
||
|
||
Careful analysis of your environment, both from the client and from the
|
||
server point of view, is the first step necessary for optimal NFS
|
||
performance. The first sections will address issues that are generally
|
||
important to the client. Later (Section 5.3 and beyond), server side issues
|
||
will be discussed. In both cases, these issues will not be limited
|
||
exclusively to one side or the other, but it is useful to separate the two in
|
||
order to get a clearer picture of cause and effect.
|
||
|
||
Aside from the general network configuration - appropriate network capacity,
|
||
faster NICs, full duplex settings in order to reduce collisions, agreement in
|
||
network speed among the switches and hubs, etc. - one of the most important
|
||
client optimization settings are the NFS data transfer buffer sizes,
|
||
specified by the mount command options rsize and wsize.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
5.1. Setting Block Size to Optimize Transfer Speeds
|
||
|
||
The mount command options rsize and wsize specify the size of the chunks of
|
||
data that the client and server pass back and forth to each other. If no
|
||
rsize and wsize options are specified, the default varies by which version of
|
||
NFS we are using. The most common default is 4K (4096 bytes), although for
|
||
TCP-based mounts in 2.2 kernels, and for all mounts beginning with 2.4
|
||
kernels, the server specifies the default block size.
|
||
|
||
The theoretical limit for the NFS V2 protocol is 8K. For the V3 protocol, the
|
||
limit is specific to the server. On the Linux server, the maximum block size
|
||
is defined by the value of the kernel constant NFSSVC_MAXBLKSIZE, found in
|
||
the Linux kernel source file ./include/linux/nfsd/const.h. The current
|
||
maximum block size for the kernel, as of 2.4.17, is 8K (8192 bytes), but the
|
||
patch set implementing NFS over TCP/IP transport in the 2.4 series, as of
|
||
this writing, uses a value of 32K (defined in the patch as 32*1024) for the
|
||
maximum block size.
|
||
|
||
All 2.4 clients currently support up to 32K block transfer sizes, allowing
|
||
the standard 32K block transfers across NFS mounts from other servers, such
|
||
as Solaris, without client modification.
|
||
|
||
The defaults may be too big or too small, depending on the specific
|
||
combination of hardware and kernels. On the one hand, some combinations of
|
||
Linux kernels and network cards (largely on older machines) cannot handle
|
||
blocks that large. On the other hand, if they can handle larger blocks, a
|
||
bigger size might be faster.
|
||
|
||
You will want to experiment and find an rsize and wsize that works and is as
|
||
fast as possible. You can test the speed of your options with some simple
|
||
commands, if your network environment is not heavily used. Note that your
|
||
results may vary widely unless you resort to using more complex benchmarks,
|
||
such as Bonnie, Bonnie++, or IOzone.
|
||
|
||
The first of these commands transfers 16384 blocks of 16k each from the
|
||
special file /dev/zero (which if you read it just spits out zeros really
|
||
fast) to the mounted partition. We will time it to see how long it takes. So,
|
||
from the client machine, type:
|
||
# time dd if=/dev/zero of=/mnt/home/testfile bs=16k count=16384
|
||
|
||
This creates a 256Mb file of zeroed bytes. In general, you should create a
|
||
file that's at least twice as large as the system RAM on the server, but make
|
||
sure you have enough disk space! Then read back the file into the great black
|
||
hole on the client machine (/dev/null) by typing the following:
|
||
# time dd if=/mnt/home/testfile of=/dev/null bs=16k
|
||
|
||
Repeat this a few times and average how long it takes. Be sure to unmount and
|
||
remount the filesystem each time (both on the client and, if you are zealous,
|
||
locally on the server as well), which should clear out any caches.
|
||
|
||
Then unmount, and mount again with a larger and smaller block size. They
|
||
should be multiples of 1024, and not larger than the maximum block size
|
||
allowed by your system. Note that NFS Version 2 is limited to a maximum of
|
||
8K, regardless of the maximum block size defined by NFSSVC_MAXBLKSIZE;
|
||
Version 3 will support up to 64K, if permitted. The block size should be a
|
||
power of two since most of the parameters that would constrain it (such as
|
||
file system block sizes and network packet size) are also powers of two.
|
||
However, some users have reported better successes with block sizes that are
|
||
not powers of two but are still multiples of the file system block size and
|
||
the network packet size.
|
||
|
||
Directly after mounting with a larger size, cd into the mounted file system
|
||
and do things like ls, explore the filesystem a bit to make sure everything
|
||
is as it should. If the rsize/wsize is too large the symptoms are very odd
|
||
and not 100% obvious. A typical symptom is incomplete file lists when doing
|
||
ls, and no error messages, or reading files failing mysteriously with no
|
||
error messages. After establishing that the given rsize/ wsize works you can
|
||
do the speed tests again. Different server platforms are likely to have
|
||
different optimal sizes.
|
||
|
||
Remember to edit /etc/fstab to reflect the rsize/wsize you found to be the
|
||
most desirable.
|
||
|
||
If your results seem inconsistent, or doubtful, you may need to analyze your
|
||
network more extensively while varying the rsize and wsize values. In that
|
||
case, here are several pointers to benchmarks that may prove useful:
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>Bonnie [http://www.textuality.com/bonnie/] http://www.textuality.com/
|
||
bonnie/
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>Bonnie++ [http://www.coker.com.au/bonnie++/] http://www.coker.com.au/
|
||
bonnie++/
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>IOzone file system benchmark [http://www.iozone.org/] http://
|
||
www.iozone.org/
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>The official NFS benchmark, SPECsfs97 [http://www.spec.org/osg/sfs97/]
|
||
http://www.spec.org/osg/sfs97/
|
||
|
||
|
||
The easiest benchmark with the widest coverage, including an extensive spread
|
||
of file sizes, and of IO types - reads, & writes, rereads & rewrites, random
|
||
access, etc. - seems to be IOzone. A recommended invocation of IOzone (for
|
||
which you must have root privileges) includes unmounting and remounting the
|
||
directory under test, in order to clear out the caches between tests, and
|
||
including the file close time in the measurements. Assuming you've already
|
||
exported /tmp to everyone from the server foo, and that you've installed
|
||
IOzone in the local directory, this should work:
|
||
# echo "foo:/tmp /mnt/foo nfs rw,hard,intr,rsize=8192,wsize=8192 0 0"
|
||
>> /etc/fstab
|
||
# mkdir /mnt/foo
|
||
# mount /mnt/foo
|
||
# ./iozone -a -R -c -U /mnt/foo -f /mnt/foo/testfile > logfile
|
||
|
||
The benchmark should take 2-3 hours at most, but of course you will need to
|
||
run it for each value of rsize and wsize that is of interest. The web site
|
||
gives full documentation of the parameters, but the specific options used
|
||
above are:
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>-a Full automatic mode, which tests file sizes of 64K to 512M, using
|
||
record sizes of 4K to 16M
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>-R Generate report in excel spreadsheet form (The "surface plot" option
|
||
for graphs is best)
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>-c Include the file close time in the tests, which will pick up the NFS
|
||
version 3 commit time
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>-U Use the given mount point to unmount and remount between tests; it
|
||
clears out caches
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>-f When using unmount, you have to locate the test file in the mounted
|
||
file system
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
5.2. Packet Size and Network Drivers
|
||
|
||
While many Linux network card drivers are excellent, some are quite shoddy,
|
||
including a few drivers for some fairly standard cards. It is worth
|
||
experimenting with your network card directly to find out how it can best
|
||
handle traffic.
|
||
|
||
Try pinging back and forth between the two machines with large packets using
|
||
the -f and -s options with ping (see ping(8) for more details) and see if a
|
||
lot of packets get dropped, or if they take a long time for a reply. If so,
|
||
you may have a problem with the performance of your network card.
|
||
|
||
For a more extensive analysis of NFS behavior in particular, use the nfsstat
|
||
command to look at nfs transactions, client and server statistics, network
|
||
statistics, and so forth. The "-o net" option will show you the number of
|
||
dropped packets in relation to the total number of transactions. In UDP
|
||
transactions, the most important statistic is the number of retransmissions,
|
||
due to dropped packets, socket buffer overflows, general server congestion,
|
||
timeouts, etc. This will have a tremendously important effect on NFS
|
||
performance, and should be carefully monitored. Note that nfsstat does not
|
||
yet implement the -z option, which would zero out all counters, so you must
|
||
look at the current nfsstat counter values prior to running the benchmarks.
|
||
|
||
To correct network problems, you may wish to reconfigure the packet size that
|
||
your network card uses. Very often there is a constraint somewhere else in
|
||
the network (such as a router) that causes a smaller maximum packet size
|
||
between two machines than what the network cards on the machines are actually
|
||
capable of. TCP should autodiscover the appropriate packet size for a
|
||
network, but UDP will simply stay at a default value. So determining the
|
||
appropriate packet size is especially important if you are using NFS over
|
||
UDP.
|
||
|
||
You can test for the network packet size using the tracepath command: From
|
||
the client machine, just type tracepath server 2049 and the path MTU should
|
||
be reported at the bottom. You can then set the MTU on your network card
|
||
equal to the path MTU, by using the MTU option to ifconfig, and see if fewer
|
||
packets get dropped. See the ifconfig man pages for details on how to reset
|
||
the MTU.
|
||
|
||
In addition, netstat -s will give the statistics collected for traffic across
|
||
all supported protocols. You may also look at /proc/net/snmp for information
|
||
about current network behavior; see the next section for more details.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
5.3. Overflow of Fragmented Packets
|
||
|
||
Using an rsize or wsize larger than your network's MTU (often set to 1500, in
|
||
many networks) will cause IP packet fragmentation when using NFS over UDP. IP
|
||
packet fragmentation and reassembly require a significant amount of CPU
|
||
resource at both ends of a network connection. In addition, packet
|
||
fragmentation also exposes your network traffic to greater unreliability,
|
||
since a complete RPC request must be retransmitted if a UDP packet fragment
|
||
is dropped for any reason. Any increase of RPC retransmissions, along with
|
||
the possibility of increased timeouts, are the single worst impediment to
|
||
performance for NFS over UDP.
|
||
|
||
Packets may be dropped for many reasons. If your network topography is
|
||
complex, fragment routes may differ, and may not all arrive at the Server for
|
||
reassembly. NFS Server capacity may also be an issue, since the kernel has a
|
||
limit of how many fragments it can buffer before it starts throwing away
|
||
packets. With kernels that support the /proc filesystem, you can monitor the
|
||
files /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ipfrag_high_thresh and /proc/sys/net/ipv4/
|
||
ipfrag_low_thresh. Once the number of unprocessed, fragmented packets reaches
|
||
the number specified by ipfrag_high_thresh (in bytes), the kernel will simply
|
||
start throwing away fragmented packets until the number of incomplete packets
|
||
reaches the number specified by ipfrag_low_thresh.
|
||
|
||
Another counter to monitor is IP: ReasmFails in the file /proc/net/snmp; this
|
||
is the number of fragment reassembly failures. if it goes up too quickly
|
||
during heavy file activity, you may have problem.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
5.4. NFS over TCP
|
||
|
||
A new feature, available for both 2.4 and 2.5 kernels but not yet integrated
|
||
into the mainstream kernel at the time of this writing, is NFS over TCP.
|
||
Using TCP has a distinct advantage and a distinct disadvantage over UDP. The
|
||
advantage is that it works far better than UDP on lossy networks. When using
|
||
TCP, a single dropped packet can be retransmitted, without the retransmission
|
||
of the entire RPC request, resulting in better performance on lossy networks.
|
||
In addition, TCP will handle network speed differences better than UDP, due
|
||
to the underlying flow control at the network level.
|
||
|
||
The disadvantage of using TCP is that it is not a stateless protocol like
|
||
UDP. If your server crashes in the middle of a packet transmission, the
|
||
client will hang and any shares will need to be unmounted and remounted.
|
||
|
||
The overhead incurred by the TCP protocol will result in somewhat slower
|
||
performance than UDP under ideal network conditions, but the cost is not
|
||
severe, and is often not noticable without careful measurement. If you are
|
||
using gigabit ethernet from end to end, you might also investigate the usage
|
||
of jumbo frames, since the high speed network may allow the larger frame
|
||
sizes without encountering increased collision rates, particularly if you
|
||
have set the network to full duplex.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
5.5. Timeout and Retransmission Values
|
||
|
||
Two mount command options, timeo and retrans, control the behavior of UDP
|
||
requests when encountering client timeouts due to dropped packets, network
|
||
congestion, and so forth. The -o timeo option allows designation of the
|
||
length of time, in tenths of seconds, that the client will wait until it
|
||
decides it will not get a reply from the server, and must try to send the
|
||
request again. The default value is 7 tenths of a second. The -o retrans
|
||
option allows designation of the number of timeouts allowed before the client
|
||
gives up, and displays the Server not responding message. The default value
|
||
is 3 attempts. Once the client displays this message, it will continue to try
|
||
to send the request, but only once before displaying the error message if
|
||
another timeout occurs. When the client reestablishes contact, it will fall
|
||
back to using the correct retrans value, and will display the Server OK
|
||
message.
|
||
|
||
If you are already encountering excessive retransmissions (see the output of
|
||
the nfsstat command), or want to increase the block transfer size without
|
||
encountering timeouts and retransmissions, you may want to adjust these
|
||
values. The specific adjustment will depend upon your environment, and in
|
||
most cases, the current defaults are appropriate.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
5.6. Number of Instances of the NFSD Server Daemon
|
||
|
||
Most startup scripts, Linux and otherwise, start 8 instances of nfsd. In the
|
||
early days of NFS, Sun decided on this number as a rule of thumb, and
|
||
everyone else copied. There are no good measures of how many instances are
|
||
optimal, but a more heavily-trafficked server may require more. You should
|
||
use at the very least one daemon per processor, but four to eight per
|
||
processor may be a better rule of thumb. If you are using a 2.4 or higher
|
||
kernel and you want to see how heavily each nfsd thread is being used, you
|
||
can look at the file /proc/net/rpc/nfsd. The last ten numbers on the th line
|
||
in that file indicate the number of seconds that the thread usage was at that
|
||
percentage of the maximum allowable. If you have a large number in the top
|
||
three deciles, you may wish to increase the number of nfsd instances. This is
|
||
done upon starting nfsd using the number of instances as the command line
|
||
option, and is specified in the NFS startup script (/etc/rc.d/init.d/nfs on
|
||
Red Hat) as RPCNFSDCOUNT. See the nfsd(8) man page for more information.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
5.7. Memory Limits on the Input Queue
|
||
|
||
On 2.2 and 2.4 kernels, the socket input queue, where requests sit while they
|
||
are currently being processed, has a small default size limit (rmem_default)
|
||
of 64k. This queue is important for clients with heavy read loads, and
|
||
servers with heavy write loads. As an example, if you are running 8 instances
|
||
of nfsd on the server, each will only have 8k to store write requests while
|
||
it processes them. In addition, the socket output queue - important for
|
||
clients with heavy write loads and servers with heavy read loads - also has a
|
||
small default size (wmem_default).
|
||
|
||
Several published runs of the NFS benchmark [http://www.spec.org/osg/sfs97/]
|
||
SPECsfs specify usage of a much higher value for both the read and write
|
||
value sets, [rw]mem_default and [rw]mem_max. You might consider increasing
|
||
these values to at least 256k. The read and write limits are set in the proc
|
||
file system using (for example) the files /proc/sys/net/core/rmem_default and
|
||
/proc/sys/net/core/rmem_max. The rmem_default value can be increased in three
|
||
steps; the following method is a bit of a hack but should work and should not
|
||
cause any problems:
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>Increase the size listed in the file:
|
||
# echo 262144 > /proc/sys/net/core/rmem_default
|
||
# echo 262144 > /proc/sys/net/core/rmem_max
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>Restart NFS. For example, on Red Hat systems,
|
||
# /etc/rc.d/init.d/nfs restart
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>You might return the size limits to their normal size in case other
|
||
kernel systems depend on it:
|
||
# echo 65536 > /proc/sys/net/core/rmem_default
|
||
# echo 65536 > /proc/sys/net/core/rmem_max
|
||
|
||
|
||
This last step may be necessary because machines have been reported to crash
|
||
if these values are left changed for long periods of time.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
5.8. Turning Off Autonegotiation of NICs and Hubs
|
||
|
||
If network cards auto-negotiate badly with hubs and switches, and ports run
|
||
at different speeds, or with different duplex configurations, performance
|
||
will be severely impacted due to excessive collisions, dropped packets, etc.
|
||
If you see excessive numbers of dropped packets in the nfsstat output, or
|
||
poor network performance in general, try playing around with the network
|
||
speed and duplex settings. If possible, concentrate on establishing a
|
||
100BaseT full duplex subnet; the virtual elimination of collisions in full
|
||
duplex will remove the most severe performance inhibitor for NFS over UDP. Be
|
||
careful when turning off autonegotiation on a card: The hub or switch that
|
||
the card is attached to will then resort to other mechanisms (such as
|
||
parallel detection) to determine the duplex settings, and some cards default
|
||
to half duplex because it is more likely to be supported by an old hub. The
|
||
best solution, if the driver supports it, is to force the card to negotiate
|
||
100BaseT full duplex.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
5.9. Synchronous vs. Asynchronous Behavior in NFS
|
||
|
||
The default export behavior for both NFS Version 2 and Version 3 protocols,
|
||
used by exportfs in nfs-utils versions prior to Version 1.11 (the latter is
|
||
in the CVS tree, but not yet released in a package, as of January, 2002) is
|
||
"asynchronous". This default permits the server to reply to client requests
|
||
as soon as it has processed the request and handed it off to the local file
|
||
system, without waiting for the data to be written to stable storage. This is
|
||
indicated by the async option denoted in the server's export list. It yields
|
||
better performance at the cost of possible data corruption if the server
|
||
reboots while still holding unwritten data and/or metadata in its caches.
|
||
This possible data corruption is not detectable at the time of occurrence,
|
||
since the async option instructs the server to lie to the client, telling the
|
||
client that all data has indeed been written to the stable storage,
|
||
regardless of the protocol used.
|
||
|
||
In order to conform with "synchronous" behavior, used as the default for most
|
||
proprietary systems supporting NFS (Solaris, HP-UX, RS/6000, etc.), and now
|
||
used as the default in the latest version of exportfs, the Linux Server's
|
||
file system must be exported with the sync option. Note that specifying
|
||
synchronous exports will result in no option being seen in the server's
|
||
export list:
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>Export a couple file systems to everyone, using slightly different
|
||
options:
|
||
|
||
# /usr/sbin/exportfs -o rw,sync *:/usr/local
|
||
# /usr/sbin/exportfs -o rw *:/tmp
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>Now we can see what the exported file system parameters look like:
|
||
|
||
# /usr/sbin/exportfs -v
|
||
/usr/local *(rw)
|
||
/tmp *(rw,async)
|
||
|
||
|
||
If your kernel is compiled with the /proc filesystem, then the file /proc/fs/
|
||
nfs/exports will also show the full list of export options.
|
||
|
||
When synchronous behavior is specified, the server will not complete (that
|
||
is, reply to the client) an NFS version 2 protocol request until the local
|
||
file system has written all data/metadata to the disk. The server will
|
||
complete a synchronous NFS version 3 request without this delay, and will
|
||
return the status of the data in order to inform the client as to what data
|
||
should be maintained in its caches, and what data is safe to discard. There
|
||
are 3 possible status values, defined an enumerated type, nfs3_stable_how, in
|
||
include/linux/nfs.h. The values, along with the subsequent actions taken due
|
||
to these results, are as follows:
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>NFS_UNSTABLE - Data/Metadata was not committed to stable storage on the
|
||
server, and must be cached on the client until a subsequent client commit
|
||
request assures that the server does send data to stable storage.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>NFS_DATA_SYNC - Metadata was not sent to stable storage, and must be
|
||
cached on the client. A subsequent commit is necessary, as is required
|
||
above.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>NFS_FILE_SYNC - No data/metadata need be cached, and a subsequent commit
|
||
need not be sent for the range covered by this request.
|
||
|
||
|
||
In addition to the above definition of synchronous behavior, the client may
|
||
explicitly insist on total synchronous behavior, regardless of the protocol,
|
||
by opening all files with the O_SYNC option. In this case, all replies to
|
||
client requests will wait until the data has hit the server's disk,
|
||
regardless of the protocol used (meaning that, in NFS version 3, all requests
|
||
will be NFS_FILE_SYNC requests, and will require that the Server returns this
|
||
status). In that case, the performance of NFS Version 2 and NFS Version 3
|
||
will be virtually identical.
|
||
|
||
If, however, the old default async behavior is used, the O_SYNC option has no
|
||
effect at all in either version of NFS, since the server will reply to the
|
||
client without waiting for the write to complete. In that case the
|
||
performance differences between versions will also disappear.
|
||
|
||
Finally, note that, for NFS version 3 protocol requests, a subsequent commit
|
||
request from the NFS client at file close time, or at fsync() time, will
|
||
force the server to write any previously unwritten data/metadata to the disk,
|
||
and the server will not reply to the client until this has been completed, as
|
||
long as sync behavior is followed. If async is used, the commit is
|
||
essentially a no-op, since the server once again lies to the client, telling
|
||
the client that the data has been sent to stable storage. This again exposes
|
||
the client and server to data corruption, since cached data may be discarded
|
||
on the client due to its belief that the server now has the data maintained
|
||
in stable storage.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
5.10. Non-NFS-Related Means of Enhancing Server Performance
|
||
|
||
In general, server performance and server disk access speed will have an
|
||
important effect on NFS performance. Offering general guidelines for setting
|
||
up a well-functioning file server is outside the scope of this document, but
|
||
a few hints may be worth mentioning:
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>If you have access to RAID arrays, use RAID 1/0 for both write speed and
|
||
redundancy; RAID 5 gives you good read speeds but lousy write speeds.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>A journalling filesystem will drastically reduce your reboot time in the
|
||
event of a system crash. Currently, [ftp://ftp.uk.linux.org/pub/linux/sct
|
||
/fs/jfs/] ext3 will work correctly with NFS version 3. In addition,
|
||
Reiserfs version 3.6 will work with NFS version 3 on 2.4.7 or later
|
||
kernels (patches are available for previous kernels). Earlier versions of
|
||
Reiserfs did not include room for generation numbers in the inode,
|
||
exposing the possibility of undetected data corruption during a server
|
||
reboot.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>Additionally, journalled file systems can be configured to maximize
|
||
performance by taking advantage of the fact that journal updates are all
|
||
that is necessary for data protection. One example is using ext3 with
|
||
data=journal so that all updates go first to the journal, and later to
|
||
the main file system. Once the journal has been updated, the NFS server
|
||
can safely issue the reply to the clients, and the main file system
|
||
update can occur at the server's leisure.
|
||
|
||
The journal in a journalling file system may also reside on a separate
|
||
device such as a flash memory card so that journal updates normally
|
||
require no seeking. With only rotational delay imposing a cost, this
|
||
gives reasonably good synchronous IO performance. Note that ext3
|
||
currently supports journal relocation, and ReiserFS will (officially)
|
||
support it soon. The Reiserfs tool package found at [ftp://
|
||
ftp.namesys.com/pub/reiserfsprogs/reiserfsprogs-3.x.0k.tar.gz] ftp://
|
||
ftp.namesys.com/pub/reiserfsprogs/reiserfsprogs-3.x.0k.tar.gz contains
|
||
the reiserfstune tool, which will allow journal relocation. It does,
|
||
however, require a kernel patch which has not yet been officially
|
||
released as of January, 2002.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>Using an automounter (such as autofs or amd) may prevent hangs if you
|
||
cross-mount files on your machines (whether on purpose or by oversight)
|
||
and one of those machines goes down. See the [http://www.linuxdoc.org/
|
||
HOWTO/mini/Automount.html] Automount Mini-HOWTO for details.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>Some manufacturers (Network Appliance, Hewlett Packard, and others)
|
||
provide NFS accelerators in the form of Non-Volatile RAM. NVRAM will
|
||
boost access speed to stable storage up to the equivalent of async
|
||
access.
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
6. Security and NFS
|
||
|
||
This list of security tips and explanations will not make your site
|
||
completely secure. NOTHING will make your site completely secure. Reading
|
||
this section may help you get an idea of the security problems with NFS. This
|
||
is not a comprehensive guide and it will always be undergoing changes. If you
|
||
have any tips or hints to give us please send them to the HOWTO maintainer.
|
||
|
||
If you are on a network with no access to the outside world (not even a
|
||
modem) and you trust all the internal machines and all your users then this
|
||
section will be of no use to you. However, its our belief that there are
|
||
relatively few networks in this situation so we would suggest reading this
|
||
section thoroughly for anyone setting up NFS.
|
||
|
||
With NFS, there are two steps required for a client to gain access to a file
|
||
contained in a remote directory on the server. The first step is mount
|
||
access. Mount access is achieved by the client machine attempting to attach
|
||
to the server. The security for this is provided by the /etc/exports file.
|
||
This file lists the names or IP addresses for machines that are allowed to
|
||
access a share point. If the client's ip address matches one of the entries
|
||
in the access list then it will be allowed to mount. This is not terribly
|
||
secure. If someone is capable of spoofing or taking over a trusted address
|
||
then they can access your mount points. To give a real-world example of this
|
||
type of "authentication": This is equivalent to someone introducing
|
||
themselves to you and you believing they are who they claim to be because
|
||
they are wearing a sticker that says "Hello, My Name is ...." Once the
|
||
machine has mounted a volume, its operating system will have access to all
|
||
files on the volume (with the possible exception of those owned by root; see
|
||
below) and write access to those files as well, if the volume was exported
|
||
with the rw option.
|
||
|
||
The second step is file access. This is a function of normal file system
|
||
access controls on the client and not a specialized function of NFS. Once the
|
||
drive is mounted the user and group permissions on the files determine access
|
||
control.
|
||
|
||
An example: bob on the server maps to the UserID 9999. Bob makes a file on
|
||
the server that is only accessible the user (the equivalent to typing chmod
|
||
600 filename). A client is allowed to mount the drive where the file is
|
||
stored. On the client mary maps to UserID 9999. This means that the client
|
||
user mary can access bob's file that is marked as only accessible by him. It
|
||
gets worse: If someone has become superuser on the client machine they can su
|
||
- username and become any user. NFS will be none the wiser.
|
||
|
||
Its not all terrible. There are a few measures you can take on the server to
|
||
offset the danger of the clients. We will cover those shortly.
|
||
|
||
If you don't think the security measures apply to you, you're probably wrong.
|
||
In Section 6.1 we'll cover securing the portmapper, server and client
|
||
security in Section 6.2 and Section 6.3 respectively. Finally, in Section 6.4
|
||
we'll briefly talk about proper firewalling for your nfs server.
|
||
|
||
Finally, it is critical that all of your nfs daemons and client programs are
|
||
current. If you think that a flaw is too recently announced for it to be a
|
||
problem for you, then you've probably already been compromised.
|
||
|
||
A good way to keep up to date on security alerts is to subscribe to the
|
||
bugtraq mailinglists. You can read up on how to subscribe and various other
|
||
information about bugtraq here: [http://www.securityfocus.com/forums/bugtraq/
|
||
faq.html] http://www.securityfocus.com/forums/bugtraq/faq.html
|
||
|
||
Additionally searching for NFS at [http://www.securityfocus.com]
|
||
securityfocus.com's search engine will show you all security reports
|
||
pertaining to NFS.
|
||
|
||
You should also regularly check CERT advisories. See the CERT web page at
|
||
[http://www.cert.org] www.cert.org.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
6.1. The portmapper
|
||
|
||
The portmapper keeps a list of what services are running on what ports. This
|
||
list is used by a connecting machine to see what ports it wants to talk to
|
||
access certain services.
|
||
|
||
The portmapper is not in as bad a shape as a few years ago but it is still a
|
||
point of worry for many sys admins. The portmapper, like NFS and NIS, should
|
||
not really have connections made to it outside of a trusted local area
|
||
network. If you have to expose them to the outside world - be careful and
|
||
keep up diligent monitoring of those systems.
|
||
|
||
Not all Linux distributions were created equal. Some seemingly up-to-date
|
||
distributions do not include a securable portmapper. The easy way to check if
|
||
your portmapper is good or not is to run strings(1) and see if it reads the
|
||
relevant files, /etc/hosts.deny and /etc/hosts.allow. Assuming your
|
||
portmapper is /sbin/portmap you can check it with this command:
|
||
strings /sbin/portmap | grep hosts.
|
||
|
||
|
||
On a securable machine it comes up something like this:
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
| /etc/hosts.allow |
|
||
| /etc/hosts.deny |
|
||
| @(#) hosts_ctl.c 1.4 94/12/28 17:42:27 |
|
||
| @(#) hosts_access.c 1.21 97/02/12 02:13:22 |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|
||
First we edit /etc/hosts.deny. It should contain the line
|
||
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
| portmap: ALL |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|
||
which will deny access to everyone. While it is closed run:
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
| rpcinfo -p |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
just to check that your portmapper really reads and obeys this file. Rpcinfo
|
||
should give no output, or possibly an error message. The files /etc/
|
||
hosts.allow and /etc/hosts.deny take effect immediately after you save them.
|
||
No daemon needs to be restarted.
|
||
|
||
Closing the portmapper for everyone is a bit drastic, so we open it again by
|
||
editing /etc/hosts.allow. But first we need to figure out what to put in it.
|
||
It should basically list all machines that should have access to your
|
||
portmapper. On a run of the mill Linux system there are very few machines
|
||
that need any access for any reason. The portmapper administers nfsd, mountd,
|
||
ypbind/ypserv, rquotad, lockd (which shows up as nlockmgr), statd (which
|
||
shows up as status) and 'r' services like ruptime and rusers. Of these only
|
||
nfsd, mountd, ypbind/ypserv and perhaps rquotad,lockd and statd are of any
|
||
consequence. All machines that need to access services on your machine should
|
||
be allowed to do that. Let's say that your machine's address is 192.168.0.254
|
||
and that it lives on the subnet 192.168.0.0, and that all machines on the
|
||
subnet should have access to it (for an overview of those terms see the the
|
||
[http://www.linuxdoc.org/HOWTO/Networking-Overview-HOWTO.html]
|
||
Networking-Overview-HOWTO). Then we write:
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
| portmap: 192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0 |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
in /etc/hosts.allow. If you are not sure what your network or netmask are,
|
||
you can use the ifconfig command to determine the netmask and the netstat
|
||
command to determine the network. For, example, for the device eth0 on the
|
||
above machine ifconfig should show:
|
||
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
| ... |
|
||
| eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:60:8C:96:D5:56 |
|
||
| inet addr:192.168.0.254 Bcast:192.168.0.255 Mask:255.255.255.0 |
|
||
| UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1 |
|
||
| RX packets:360315 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 |
|
||
| TX packets:179274 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 |
|
||
| Interrupt:10 Base address:0x320 |
|
||
| ... |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
and netstat -rn should show:
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
| Kernel routing table |
|
||
| Destination Gateway Genmask Flags Metric Ref Use Iface |
|
||
| ... |
|
||
| 192.168.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 U 0 0 174412 eth0 |
|
||
| ... |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
(The network address is in the first column).
|
||
|
||
The /etc/hosts.deny and /etc/hosts.allow files are described in the manual
|
||
pages of the same names.
|
||
|
||
IMPORTANT: Do not put anything but IP NUMBERS in the portmap lines of these
|
||
files. Host name lookups can indirectly cause portmap activity which will
|
||
trigger host name lookups which can indirectly cause portmap activity which
|
||
will trigger...
|
||
|
||
Versions 0.2.0 and higher of the nfs-utils package also use the hosts.allow
|
||
and hosts.deny files, so you should put in entries for lockd, statd, mountd,
|
||
and rquotad in these files too. For a complete example, see Section 3.2.2.
|
||
|
||
The above things should make your server tighter. The only remaining problem
|
||
is if someone gains administrative access to one of your trusted client
|
||
machines and is able to send bogus NFS requests. The next section deals with
|
||
safeguards against this problem.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
6.2. Server security: nfsd and mountd
|
||
|
||
On the server we can decide that we don't want to trust any requests made as
|
||
root on the client. We can do that by using the root_squash option in /etc/
|
||
exports:
|
||
/home slave1(rw,root_squash)
|
||
|
||
|
||
This is, in fact, the default. It should always be turned on unless you have
|
||
a very good reason to turn it off. To turn it off use the no_root_squash
|
||
option.
|
||
|
||
Now, if a user with UID 0 (i.e., root's user ID number) on the client
|
||
attempts to access (read, write, delete) the file system, the server
|
||
substitutes the UID of the server's 'nobody' account. Which means that the
|
||
root user on the client can't access or change files that only root on the
|
||
server can access or change. That's good, and you should probably use
|
||
root_squash on all the file systems you export. "But the root user on the
|
||
client can still use su to become any other user and access and change that
|
||
users files!" say you. To which the answer is: Yes, and that's the way it is,
|
||
and has to be with Unix and NFS. This has one important implication: All
|
||
important binaries and files should be owned by root, and not bin or other
|
||
non-root account, since the only account the clients root user cannot access
|
||
is the servers root account. In the exports(5) man page there are several
|
||
other squash options listed so that you can decide to mistrust whomever you
|
||
(don't) like on the clients.
|
||
|
||
The TCP ports 1-1024 are reserved for root's use (and therefore sometimes
|
||
referred to as "secure ports") A non-root user cannot bind these ports.
|
||
Adding the secure option to an /etc/exports means that it will only listed to
|
||
requests coming from ports 1-1024 on the client, so that a malicious non-root
|
||
user on the client cannot come along and open up a spoofed NFS dialogue on a
|
||
non-reserved port. This option is set by default.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
6.3. Client Security
|
||
|
||
6.3.1. The nosuid mount option
|
||
|
||
On the client we can decide that we don't want to trust the server too much a
|
||
couple of ways with options to mount. For example we can forbid suid programs
|
||
to work off the NFS file system with the nosuid option. Some unix programs,
|
||
such as passwd, are called "suid" programs: They set the id of the person
|
||
running them to whomever is the owner of the file. If a file is owned by root
|
||
and is suid, then the program will execute as root, so that they can perform
|
||
operations (such as writing to the password file) that only root is allowed
|
||
to do. Using the nosuid option is a good idea and you should consider using
|
||
this with all NFS mounted disks. It means that the server's root user cannot
|
||
make a suid-root program on the file system, log in to the client as a normal
|
||
user and then use the suid-root program to become root on the client too. One
|
||
could also forbid execution of files on the mounted file system altogether
|
||
with the noexec option. But this is more likely to be impractical than nosuid
|
||
since a file system is likely to at least contain some scripts or programs
|
||
that need to be executed.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
6.3.2. The broken_suid mount option
|
||
|
||
Some older programs (xterm being one of them) used to rely on the idea that
|
||
root can write everywhere. This is will break under new kernels on NFS
|
||
mounts. The security implications are that programs that do this type of suid
|
||
action can potentially be used to change your apparent uid on nfs servers
|
||
doing uid mapping. So the default has been to disable this broken_suid in the
|
||
linux kernel.
|
||
|
||
The long and short of it is this: If you're using an old linux distribution,
|
||
some sort of old suid program or an older unix of some type you might have to
|
||
mount from your clients with the broken_suid option to mount. However, most
|
||
recent unixes and linux distros have xterm and such programs just as a normal
|
||
executable with no suid status, they call programs to do their setuid work.
|
||
|
||
You enter the above options in the options column, with the rsize and wsize,
|
||
separated by commas.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
6.3.3. Securing portmapper, rpc.statd, and rpc.lockd on the client
|
||
|
||
In the current (2.2.18+) implementation of NFS, full file locking is
|
||
supported. This means that rpc.statd and rpc.lockd must be running on the
|
||
client in order for locks to function correctly. These services require the
|
||
portmapper to be running. So, most of the problems you will find with nfs on
|
||
the server you may also be plagued with on the client. Read through the
|
||
portmapper section above for information on securing the portmapper.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
6.4. NFS and firewalls (ipchains and netfilter)
|
||
|
||
IPchains (under the 2.2.X kernels) and netfilter (under the 2.4.x kernels)
|
||
allow a good level of security - instead of relying on the daemon (or perhaps
|
||
its TCP wrapper) to determine which machines can connect, the connection
|
||
attempt is allowed or disallowed at a lower level. In this case, you can stop
|
||
the connection much earlier and more globally, which can protect you from all
|
||
sorts of attacks.
|
||
|
||
Describing how to set up a Linux firewall is well beyond the scope of this
|
||
document. Interested readers may wish to read the [http://www.linuxdoc.org/
|
||
HOWTO/Firewall-HOWTO.html] Firewall-HOWTO or the [http://www.linuxdoc.org/
|
||
HOWTO/IPCHAINS-HOWTO.HTML] IPCHAINS-HOWTO. For users of kernel 2.4 and above
|
||
you might want to visit the netfilter webpage at: [http://
|
||
netfilter.filewatcher.org] http://netfilter.filewatcher.org. If you are
|
||
already familiar with the workings of ipchains or netfilter this section will
|
||
give you a few tips on how to better setup your NFS daemons to more easily
|
||
firewall and protect them.
|
||
|
||
A good rule to follow for your firewall configuration is to deny all, and
|
||
allow only some - this helps to keep you from accidentally allowing more than
|
||
you intended.
|
||
|
||
In order to understand how to firewall the NFS daemons, it will help to
|
||
breifly review how they bind to ports.
|
||
|
||
When a daemon starts up, it requests a free port from the portmapper. The
|
||
portmapper gets the port for the daemon and keeps track of the port currently
|
||
used by that daemon. When other hosts or processes need to communicate with
|
||
the daemon, they request the port number from the portmapper in order to find
|
||
the daemon. So the ports will perpetually float because different ports may
|
||
be free at different times and so the portmapper will allocate them
|
||
differently each time. This is a pain for setting up a firewall. If you never
|
||
know where the daemons are going to be then you don't know precisely which
|
||
ports to allow access to. This might not be a big deal for many people
|
||
running on a protected or isolated LAN. For those people on a public network,
|
||
though, this is horrible.
|
||
|
||
In kernels 2.4.13 and later with nfs-utils 0.3.3 or later you no longer have
|
||
to worry about the floating of ports in the portmapper. Now all of the
|
||
daemons pertaining to nfs can be "pinned" to a port. Most of them nicely take
|
||
a -p option when they are started; those daemons that are started by the
|
||
kernel take some kernel arguments or module options. They are described
|
||
below.
|
||
|
||
Some of the daemons involved in sharing data via nfs are already bound to a
|
||
port. portmap is always on port 111 tcp and udp. nfsd is always on port 2049
|
||
TCP and UDP (however, as of kernel 2.4.17, NFS over TCP is considered
|
||
experimental and is not for use on production machines).
|
||
|
||
The other daemons, statd, mountd, lockd, and rquotad, will normally move
|
||
around to the first available port they are informed of by the portmapper.
|
||
|
||
To force statd to bind to a particular port, use the -p portnum option. To
|
||
force statd to respond on a particular port, additionally use the -o portnum
|
||
option when starting it.
|
||
|
||
To force mountd to bind to a particular port use the -p portnum option.
|
||
|
||
For example, to have statd broadcast of port 32765 and listen on port 32766,
|
||
and mountd listen on port 32767, you would type:
|
||
# statd -p 32765 -o 32766
|
||
# mountd -p 32767
|
||
|
||
lockd is started by the kernel when it is needed. Therefore you need to pass
|
||
module options (if you have it built as a module) or kernel options to force
|
||
lockd to listen and respond only on certain ports.
|
||
|
||
If you are using loadable modules and you would like to specify these options
|
||
in your /etc/modules.conf file add a line like this to the file:
|
||
options lockd nlm_udpport=32768 nlm_tcpport=32768
|
||
|
||
The above line would specify the udp and tcp port for lockd to be 32768.
|
||
|
||
If you are not using loadable modules or if you have compiled lockd into the
|
||
kernel instead of building it as a module then you will need to pass it an
|
||
option on the kernel boot line.
|
||
|
||
It should look something like this:
|
||
vmlinuz 3 root=/dev/hda1 lockd.udpport=32768 lockd.tcpport=32768
|
||
|
||
The port numbers do not have to match but it would simply add unnecessary
|
||
confusion if they didn't.
|
||
|
||
If you are using quotas and using rpc.quotad to make these quotas viewable
|
||
over nfs you will need to also take it into account when setting up your
|
||
firewall. There are two rpc.rquotad source trees. One of those is maintained
|
||
in the nfs-utils tree. The other in the quota-tools tree. They do not operate
|
||
identically. The one provided with nfs-utils supports binding the daemon to a
|
||
port with the -p directive. The one in quota-tools does not. Consult your
|
||
distribution's documentation to determine if yours does.
|
||
|
||
For the sake of this discussion lets describe a network and setup a firewall
|
||
to protect our nfs server. Our nfs server is 192.168.0.42 our client is
|
||
192.168.0.45 only. As in the example above, statd has been started so that it
|
||
only binds to port 32765 for incoming requests and it must answer on port
|
||
32766. mountd is forced to bind to port 32767. lockd's module parameters have
|
||
been set to bind to 32768. nfsd is, of course, on port 2049 and the
|
||
portmapper is on port 111.
|
||
|
||
We are not using quotas.
|
||
|
||
Using IPCHAINS, a simple firewall might look something like this:
|
||
ipchains -A input -f -j ACCEPT -s 192.168.0.45
|
||
ipchains -A input -s 192.168.0.45 -d 0/0 32765:32768 -p 6 -j ACCEPT
|
||
ipchains -A input -s 192.168.0.45 -d 0/0 32765:32768 -p 17 -j ACCEPT
|
||
ipchains -A input -s 192.168.0.45 -d 0/0 2049 -p 17 -j ACCEPT
|
||
ipchains -A input -s 192.168.0.45 -d 0/0 2049 -p 6 -j ACCEPT
|
||
ipchains -A input -s 192.168.0.45 -d 0/0 111 -p 6 -j ACCEPT
|
||
ipchains -A input -s 192.168.0.45 -d 0/0 111 -p 17 -j ACCEPT
|
||
ipchains -A input -s 0/0 -d 0/0 -p 6 -j DENY -y -l
|
||
ipchains -A input -s 0/0 -d 0/0 -p 17 -j DENY -l
|
||
|
||
The equivalent set of commands in netfilter is:
|
||
iptables -A INPUT -f -j ACCEPT -s 192.168.0.45
|
||
iptables -A INPUT -s 192.168.0.45 -d 0/0 32765:32768 -p 6 -j ACCEPT
|
||
iptables -A INPUT -s 192.168.0.45 -d 0/0 32765:32768 -p 17 -j ACCEPT
|
||
iptables -A INPUT -s 192.168.0.45 -d 0/0 2049 -p 17 -j ACCEPT
|
||
iptables -A INPUT -s 192.168.0.45 -d 0/0 2049 -p 6 -j ACCEPT
|
||
iptables -A INPUT -s 192.168.0.45 -d 0/0 111 -p 6 -j ACCEPT
|
||
iptables -A INPUT -s 192.168.0.45 -d 0/0 111 -p 17 -j ACCEPT
|
||
iptables -A INPUT -s 0/0 -d 0/0 -p 6 -j DENY --syn --log-level 5
|
||
iptables -A INPUT -s 0/0 -d 0/0 -p 17 -j DENY --log-level 5
|
||
|
||
The first line says to accept all packet fragments (except the first packet
|
||
fragment which will be treated as a normal packet). In theory no packet will
|
||
pass through until it is reassembled, and it won't be reassembled unless the
|
||
first packet fragment is passed. Of course there are attacks that can be
|
||
generated by overloading a machine with packet fragments. But NFS won't work
|
||
correctly unless you let fragments through. See Section 7.8 for details.
|
||
|
||
The other lines allow specific connections from any port on our client host
|
||
to the specific ports we have made available on our server. This means that
|
||
if, say, 192.158.0.46 attempts to contact the NFS server it will not be able
|
||
to mount or see what mounts are available.
|
||
|
||
With the new port pinning capabilities it is obviously much easier to control
|
||
what hosts are allowed to mount your NFS shares. It is worth mentioning that
|
||
NFS is not an encrypted protocol and anyone on the same physical network
|
||
could sniff the traffic and reassemble the information being passed back and
|
||
forth.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
6.5. Tunneling NFS through SSH
|
||
|
||
One method of encrypting NFS traffic over a network is to use the
|
||
port-forwarding capabilities of ssh. However, as we shall see, doing so has a
|
||
serious drawback if you do not utterly and completely trust the local users
|
||
on your server.
|
||
|
||
The first step will be to export files to the localhost. For example, to
|
||
export the /home partition, enter the following into /etc/exports:
|
||
/home 127.0.0.1(rw)
|
||
|
||
The next step is to use ssh to forward ports. For example, ssh can tell the
|
||
server to forward to any port on any machine from a port on the client. Let
|
||
us assume, as in the previous section, that our server is 192.168.0.42, and
|
||
that we have pinned mountd to port 32767 using the argument -p 32767. Then,
|
||
on the client, we'll type:
|
||
# ssh root@192.168.0.42 -L 250:localhost:2049 -f sleep 60m
|
||
# ssh root@192.168.0.42 -L 251:localhost:32767 -f sleep 60m
|
||
|
||
The above command causes ssh on the client to take any request directed at
|
||
the client's port 250 and forward it, first through sshd on the server, and
|
||
then on to the server's port 2049. The second line causes a similar type of
|
||
forwarding between requests to port 251 on the client and port 32767 on the
|
||
server. The localhost is relative to the server; that is, the forwarding will
|
||
be done to the server itself. The port could otherwise have been made to
|
||
forward to any other machine, and the requests would look to the outside
|
||
world as if they were coming from the server. Thus, the requests will appear
|
||
to NFSD on the server as if they are coming from the server itself. Note that
|
||
in order to bind to a port below 1024 on the client, we have to run this
|
||
command as root on the client. Doing this will be necessary if we have
|
||
exported our filesystem with the default secure option.
|
||
|
||
Finally, we are pulling a little trick with the last option, -f sleep 60m.
|
||
Normally, when we use ssh, even with the -L option, we will open up a shell
|
||
on the remote machine. But instead, we just want the port forwarding to
|
||
execute in the background so that we get our shell on the client back. So, we
|
||
tell ssh to execute a command in the background on the server to sleep for 60
|
||
minutes. This will cause the port to be forwarded for 60 minutes until it
|
||
gets a connection; at that point, the port will continue to be forwarded
|
||
until the connection dies or until the 60 minutes are up, whichever happens
|
||
later. The above command could be put in our startup scripts on the client,
|
||
right after the network is started.
|
||
|
||
Next, we have to mount the filesystem on the client. To do this, we tell the
|
||
client to mount a filesystem on the localhost, but at a different port from
|
||
the usual 2049. Specifically, an entry in /etc/fstab would look like:
|
||
localhost:/home /mnt/home nfs rw,hard,intr,port=250,mountport=251 0 0
|
||
|
||
Having done this, we can see why the above will be incredibly insecure if we
|
||
have any ordinary users who are able to log in to the server locally. If they
|
||
can, there is nothing preventing them from doing what we did and using ssh to
|
||
forward a privileged port on their own client machine (where they are
|
||
legitimately root) to ports 2049 and 32767 on the server. Thus, any ordinary
|
||
user on the server can mount our filesystems with the same rights as root on
|
||
our client.
|
||
|
||
If you are using an NFS server that does not have a way for ordinary users to
|
||
log in, and you wish to use this method, there are two additional caveats:
|
||
First, the connection travels from the client to the server via sshd;
|
||
therefore you will have to leave port 22 (where sshd listens) open to your
|
||
client on the firewall. However you do not need to leave the other ports,
|
||
such as 2049 and 32767, open anymore. Second, file locking will no longer
|
||
work. It is not possible to ask statd or the locking manager to make requests
|
||
to a particular port for a particular mount; therefore, any locking requests
|
||
will cause statd to connect to statd on localhost, i.e., itself, and it will
|
||
fail with an error. Any attempt to correct this would require a major rewrite
|
||
of NFS.
|
||
|
||
It may also be possible to use IPSec to encrypt network traffic between your
|
||
client and your server, without compromising any local security on the
|
||
server; this will not be taken up here. See the [http://www.freeswan.org/]
|
||
FreeS/WAN home page for details on using IPSec under Linux.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
6.6. Summary
|
||
|
||
If you use the hosts.allow, hosts.deny, root_squash, nosuid and privileged
|
||
port features in the portmapper/NFS software, you avoid many of the presently
|
||
known bugs in NFS and can almost feel secure about that at least. But still,
|
||
after all that: When an intruder has access to your network, s/he can make
|
||
strange commands appear in your .forward or read your mail when /home or /var
|
||
/mail is NFS exported. For the same reason, you should never access your PGP
|
||
private key over NFS. Or at least you should know the risk involved. And now
|
||
you know a bit of it.
|
||
|
||
NFS and the portmapper makes up a complex subsystem and therefore it's not
|
||
totally unlikely that new bugs will be discovered, either in the basic design
|
||
or the implementation we use. There might even be holes known now, which
|
||
someone is abusing. But that's life.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
7. Troubleshooting
|
||
|
||
|
||
This is intended as a step-by-step guide to what to do when things go
|
||
wrong using NFS. Usually trouble first rears its head on the client end,
|
||
so this diagnostic will begin there.
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
7.1. Unable to See Files on a Mounted File System
|
||
|
||
First, check to see if the file system is actually mounted. There are several
|
||
ways of doing this. The most reliable way is to look at the file /proc/
|
||
mounts, which will list all mounted filesystems and give details about them.
|
||
If this doesn't work (for example if you don't have the /proc filesystem
|
||
compiled into your kernel), you can type mount -f although you get less
|
||
information.
|
||
|
||
If the file system appears to be mounted, then you may have mounted another
|
||
file system on top of it (in which case you should unmount and remount both
|
||
volumes), or you may have exported the file system on the server before you
|
||
mounted it there, in which case NFS is exporting the underlying mount point
|
||
(if so then you need to restart NFS on the server).
|
||
|
||
If the file system is not mounted, then attempt to mount it. If this does not
|
||
work, see Symptom 3.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
7.2. File requests hang or timeout waiting for access to the file.
|
||
|
||
This usually means that the client is unable to communicate with the server.
|
||
See Symptom 3 letter b.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
7.3. Unable to mount a file system
|
||
|
||
There are two common errors that mount produces when it is unable to mount a
|
||
volume. These are:
|
||
|
||
a. failed, reason given by server: Permission denied
|
||
|
||
This means that the server does not recognize that you have access to the
|
||
volume.
|
||
|
||
i. Check your /etc/exports file and make sure that the volume is
|
||
exported and that your client has the right kind of access to it. For
|
||
example, if a client only has read access then you have to mount the
|
||
volume with the ro option rather than the rw option.
|
||
|
||
ii. Make sure that you have told NFS to register any changes you made to
|
||
/etc/exports since starting nfsd by running the exportfs command. Be
|
||
sure to type exportfs -ra to be extra certain that the exports are
|
||
being re-read.
|
||
|
||
iii. Check the file /proc/fs/nfs/exports and make sure the volume and
|
||
client are listed correctly. (You can also look at the file /var/lib/
|
||
nfs/xtab for an unabridged list of how all the active export options
|
||
are set.) If they are not, then you have not re-exported properly. If
|
||
they are listed, make sure the server recognizes your client as being
|
||
the machine you think it is. For example, you may have an old listing
|
||
for the client in /etc/hosts that is throwing off the server, or you
|
||
may not have listed the client's complete address and it may be
|
||
resolving to a machine in a different domain. One trick is login to
|
||
the server from the client via ssh or telnet; if you then type who,
|
||
one of the listings should be your login session and the name of your
|
||
client machine as the server sees it. Try using this machine name in
|
||
your /etc/exports entry. Finally, try to ping the client from the
|
||
server, and try to ping the server from the client. If this doesn't
|
||
work, or if there is packet loss, you may have lower-level network
|
||
problems.
|
||
|
||
iv. It is not possible to export both a directory and its child (for
|
||
example both /usr and /usr/local). You should export the parent
|
||
directory with the necessary permissions, and all of its
|
||
subdirectories can then be mounted with those same permissions.
|
||
|
||
|
||
b. RPC: Program Not Registered: (or another "RPC" error):
|
||
|
||
This means that the client does not detect NFS running on the server.
|
||
This could be for several reasons.
|
||
|
||
i. First, check that NFS actually is running on the server by typing
|
||
rpcinfo -p on the server. You should see something like this:
|
||
+------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
| program vers proto port |
|
||
| 100000 2 tcp 111 portmapper |
|
||
| 100000 2 udp 111 portmapper |
|
||
| 100011 1 udp 749 rquotad |
|
||
| 100011 2 udp 749 rquotad |
|
||
| 100005 1 udp 759 mountd |
|
||
| 100005 1 tcp 761 mountd |
|
||
| 100005 2 udp 764 mountd |
|
||
| 100005 2 tcp 766 mountd |
|
||
| 100005 3 udp 769 mountd |
|
||
| 100005 3 tcp 771 mountd |
|
||
| 100003 2 udp 2049 nfs |
|
||
| 100003 3 udp 2049 nfs |
|
||
| 300019 1 tcp 830 amd |
|
||
| 300019 1 udp 831 amd |
|
||
| 100024 1 udp 944 status |
|
||
| 100024 1 tcp 946 status |
|
||
| 100021 1 udp 1042 nlockmgr |
|
||
| 100021 3 udp 1042 nlockmgr |
|
||
| 100021 4 udp 1042 nlockmgr |
|
||
| 100021 1 tcp 1629 nlockmgr |
|
||
| 100021 3 tcp 1629 nlockmgr |
|
||
| 100021 4 tcp 1629 nlockmgr |
|
||
| |
|
||
+------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
This says that we have NFS versions 2 and 3, rpc.statd version 1,
|
||
network lock manager (the service name for rpc.lockd) versions 1, 3,
|
||
and 4. There are also different service listings depending on whether
|
||
NFS is travelling over TCP or UDP. UDP is usually (but not always)
|
||
the default unless TCP is explicitly requested.
|
||
|
||
If you do not see at least portmapper, nfs, and mountd, then you need
|
||
to restart NFS. If you are not able to restart successfully, proceed
|
||
to Symptom 9.
|
||
|
||
ii. Now check to make sure you can see it from the client. On the client,
|
||
type rpcinfo -p server where server is the DNS name or IP address of
|
||
your server.
|
||
|
||
If you get a listing, then make sure that the type of mount you are
|
||
trying to perform is supported. For example, if you are trying to
|
||
mount using Version 3 NFS, make sure Version 3 is listed; if you are
|
||
trying to mount using NFS over TCP, make sure that is registered.
|
||
(Some non-Linux clients default to TCP). Type man rpcinfo for more
|
||
details on how to read the output. If the type of mount you are
|
||
trying to perform is not listed, try a different type of mount.
|
||
|
||
If you get the error No Remote Programs Registered, then you need to
|
||
check your /etc/hosts.allow and /etc/hosts.deny files on the server
|
||
and make sure your client actually is allowed access. Again, if the
|
||
entries appear correct, check /etc/hosts (or your DNS server) and
|
||
make sure that the machine is listed correctly, and make sure you can
|
||
ping the server from the client. Also check the error logs on the
|
||
system for helpful messages: Authentication errors from bad /etc/
|
||
hosts.allow entries will usually appear in /var/log/messages, but may
|
||
appear somewhere else depending on how your system logs are set up.
|
||
The man pages for syslog can help you figure out how your logs are
|
||
set up. Finally, some older operating systems may behave badly when
|
||
routes between the two machines are asymmetric. Try typing tracepath
|
||
[server] from the client and see if the word "asymmetric" shows up
|
||
anywhere in the output. If it does then this may be causing packet
|
||
loss. However asymmetric routes are not usually a problem on recent
|
||
linux distributions.
|
||
|
||
If you get the error Remote system error - No route to host, but you
|
||
can ping the server correctly, then you are the victim of an
|
||
overzealous firewall. Check any firewalls that may be set up, either
|
||
on the server or on any routers in between the client and the server.
|
||
Look at the man pages for ipchains, netfilter, and ipfwadm, as well
|
||
as the [http://www.linuxdoc.org/HOWTO/IPCHAINS-HOWTO.html]
|
||
IPChains-HOWTO and the [http://www.linuxdoc.org/HOWTO/
|
||
Firewall-HOWTO.html] Firewall-HOWTO for help.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
7.4. I do not have permission to access files on the mounted volume.
|
||
|
||
This could be one of two problems.
|
||
|
||
If it is a write permission problem, check the export options on the server
|
||
by looking at /proc/fs/nfs/exports and make sure the filesystem is not
|
||
exported read-only. If it is you will need to re-export it read/write (don't
|
||
forget to run exportfs -ra after editing /etc/exports). Also, check /proc/
|
||
mounts and make sure the volume is mounted read/write (although if it is
|
||
mounted read-only you ought to get a more specific error message). If not
|
||
then you need to re-mount with the rw option.
|
||
|
||
The second problem has to do with username mappings, and is different
|
||
depending on whether you are trying to do this as root or as a non-root user.
|
||
|
||
If you are not root, then usernames may not be in sync on the client and the
|
||
server. Type id [user] on both the client and the server and make sure they
|
||
give the same UID number. If they don't then you are having problems with
|
||
NIS, NIS+, rsync, or whatever system you use to sync usernames. Check group
|
||
names to make sure that they match as well. Also, make sure you are not
|
||
exporting with the all_squash option. If the user names match then the user
|
||
has a more general permissions problem unrelated to NFS.
|
||
|
||
If you are root, then you are probably not exporting with the no_root_squash
|
||
option; check /proc/fs/nfs/exports or /var/lib/nfs/xtab on the server and
|
||
make sure the option is listed. In general, being able to write to the NFS
|
||
server as root is a bad idea unless you have an urgent need -- which is why
|
||
Linux NFS prevents it by default. See Section 6 for details.
|
||
|
||
If you have root squashing, you want to keep it, and you're only trying to
|
||
get root to have the same permissions on the file that the user nobody should
|
||
have, then remember that it is the server that determines which uid root gets
|
||
mapped to. By default, the server uses the UID and GID of nobody in the /etc/
|
||
passwd file, but this can also be overridden with the anonuid and anongid
|
||
options in the /etc/exports file. Make sure that the client and the server
|
||
agree about which UID nobody gets mapped to.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
7.5. When I transfer really big files, NFS takes over all the CPU cycles on
|
||
the server and it screeches to a halt.
|
||
|
||
This is a problem with the fsync() function in 2.2 kernels that causes all
|
||
sync-to-disk requests to be cumulative, resulting in a write time that is
|
||
quadratic in the file size. If you can, upgrading to a 2.4 kernel should
|
||
solve the problem. Also, exporting with the no_wdelay option forces the
|
||
program to use o_sync() instead, which may prove faster.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
7.6. Strange error or log messages
|
||
|
||
a. Messages of the following format:
|
||
|
||
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
| Jan 7 09:15:29 server kernel: fh_verify: mail/guest permission failure, acc=4, error=13 |
|
||
| Jan 7 09:23:51 server kernel: fh_verify: ekonomi/test permission failure, acc=4, error=13 |
|
||
| |
|
||
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|
||
These happen when a NFS setattr operation is attempted on a file you
|
||
don't have write access to. The messages are harmless.
|
||
|
||
b. The following messages frequently appear in the logs:
|
||
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
| kernel: nfs: server server.domain.name not responding, still trying |
|
||
| kernel: nfs: task 10754 can't get a request slot |
|
||
| kernel: nfs: server server.domain.name OK |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|
||
The "can't get a request slot" message means that the client-side RPC
|
||
code has detected a lot of timeouts (perhaps due to network congestion,
|
||
perhaps due to an overloaded server), and is throttling back the number
|
||
of concurrent outstanding requests in an attempt to lighten the load. The
|
||
cause of these messages is basically sluggish performance. See Section 5
|
||
for details.
|
||
|
||
c. After mounting, the following message appears on the client:
|
||
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|nfs warning: mount version older than kernel |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|
||
It means what it says: You should upgrade your mount package and/or
|
||
am-utils. (If for some reason upgrading is a problem, you may be able to
|
||
get away with just recompiling them so that the newer kernel features are
|
||
recognized at compile time).
|
||
|
||
d. Errors in startup/shutdown log for lockd
|
||
|
||
You may see a message of the following kind in your boot log:
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|nfslock: rpc.lockd startup failed |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|
||
They are harmless. Older versions of rpc.lockd needed to be started up
|
||
manually, but newer versions are started automatically by nfsd. Many of
|
||
the default startup scripts still try to start up lockd by hand, in case
|
||
it is necessary. You can alter your startup scripts if you want the
|
||
messages to go away.
|
||
|
||
e. The following message appears in the logs:
|
||
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|kmem_create: forcing size word alignment - nfs_fh |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|
||
This results from the file handle being 16 bits instead of a mulitple of
|
||
32 bits, which makes the kernel grimace. It is harmless.
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
7.7. Real permissions don't match what's in /etc/exports.
|
||
|
||
/etc/exports is very sensitive to whitespace - so the following statements
|
||
are not the same:
|
||
/export/dir hostname(rw,no_root_squash)
|
||
/export/dir hostname (rw,no_root_squash)
|
||
|
||
The first will grant hostname rw access to /export/dir without squashing root
|
||
privileges. The second will grant hostname rw privileges with root squash and
|
||
it will grant everyone else read/write access, without squashing root
|
||
privileges. Nice huh?
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
7.8. Flaky and unreliable behavior
|
||
|
||
Simple commands such as ls work, but anything that transfers a large amount
|
||
of information causes the mount point to lock.
|
||
|
||
This could be one of two problems:
|
||
|
||
i. It will happen if you have ipchains on at the server and/or the client
|
||
and you are not allowing fragmented packets through the chains. Allow
|
||
fragments from the remote host and you'll be able to function again. See
|
||
Section 6.4 for details on how to do this.
|
||
|
||
ii. You may be using a larger rsize and wsize in your mount options than the
|
||
server supports. Try reducing rsize and wsize to 1024 and seeing if the
|
||
problem goes away. If it does, then increase them slowly to a more
|
||
reasonable value.
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
7.9. nfsd won't start
|
||
|
||
Check the file /etc/exports and make sure root has read permission. Check the
|
||
binaries and make sure they are executable. Make sure your kernel was
|
||
compiled with NFS server support. You may need to reinstall your binaries if
|
||
none of these ideas helps.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
7.10. File Corruption When Using Multiple Clients
|
||
|
||
If a file has been modified within one second of its previous modification
|
||
and left the same size, it will continue to generate the same inode number.
|
||
Because of this, constant reads and writes to a file by multiple clients may
|
||
cause file corruption. Fixing this bug requires changes deep within the
|
||
filesystem layer, and therefore it is a 2.5 item.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
8. Using Linux NFS with Other OSes
|
||
|
||
Every operating system, Linux included, has quirks and deviations in the
|
||
behavior of its NFS implementation -- sometimes because the protocols are
|
||
vague, sometimes because they leave gaping security holes. Linux will work
|
||
properly with all major vendors' NFS implementations, as far as we know.
|
||
However, there may be extra steps involved to make sure the two OSes are
|
||
communicating clearly with one another. This section details those steps.
|
||
|
||
In general, it is highly ill-advised to attempt to use a Linux machine with a
|
||
kernel before 2.2.18 as an NFS server for non-Linux clients. Implementations
|
||
with older kernels may work fine as clients; however if you are using one of
|
||
these kernels and get stuck, the first piece of advice we would give is to
|
||
upgrade your kernel and see if the problems go away. The user-space NFS
|
||
implementations also do not work well with non-Linux clients.
|
||
|
||
Following is a list of known issues for using Linux together with major
|
||
operating systems.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
8.1. AIX
|
||
|
||
8.1.1. Linux Clients and AIX Servers
|
||
|
||
The format for the /etc/exports file for our example in Section 3 is:
|
||
/usr slave1.foo.com:slave2.foo.com,access=slave1.foo.com:slave2.foo.com
|
||
/home slave1.foo.com:slave2.foo.com,rw=slave1.foo.com:slave2.foo.com
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
8.1.2. AIX clients and Linux Servers
|
||
|
||
AIX uses the file /etc/filesystems instead of /etc/fstab. A sample entry,
|
||
based on the example in Section 4, looks like this:
|
||
/mnt/home:
|
||
dev = "/home"
|
||
vfs = nfs
|
||
nodename = master.foo.com
|
||
mount = true
|
||
options = bg,hard,intr,rsize=1024,wsize=1024,vers=2,proto=udp
|
||
account = false
|
||
|
||
|
||
i. Version 4.3.2 of AIX, and possibly earlier versions as well, requires
|
||
that file systems be exported with the insecure option, which causes NFS
|
||
to listen to requests from insecure ports (i.e., ports above 1024, to
|
||
which non-root users can bind). Older versions of AIX do not seem to
|
||
require this.
|
||
|
||
ii. AIX clients will default to mounting version 3 NFS over TCP. If your
|
||
Linux server does not support this, then you may need to specify vers=2
|
||
and/or proto=udp in your mount options.
|
||
|
||
iii. Using netmasks in /etc/exports seems to sometimes cause clients to lose
|
||
mounts when another client is reset. This can be fixed by listing out
|
||
hosts explicitly.
|
||
|
||
iv. Apparently automount in AIX 4.3.2 is rather broken.
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
8.2. BSD
|
||
|
||
8.2.1. BSD servers and Linux clients
|
||
|
||
BSD kernels tend to work better with larger block sizes.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
8.2.2. Linux servers and BSD clients
|
||
|
||
Some versions of BSD may make requests to the server from insecure ports, in
|
||
which case you will need to export your volumes with the insecure option. See
|
||
the man page for exports(5) for more details.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
8.3. Tru64 Unix
|
||
|
||
8.3.1. Tru64 Unix Servers and Linux Clients
|
||
|
||
In general, Tru64 Unix servers work quite smoothly with Linux clients. The
|
||
format for the /etc/exports file for our example in Section 3 is:
|
||
|
||
/usr slave1.foo.com:slave2.foo.com \
|
||
-access=slave1.foo.com:slave2.foo.com \
|
||
|
||
/home slave1.foo.com:slave2.foo.com \
|
||
-rw=slave1.foo.com:slave2.foo.com \
|
||
-root=slave1.foo.com:slave2.foo.com
|
||
|
||
|
||
(The root option is listed in the last entry for informational purposes only;
|
||
its use is not recommended unless necessary.)
|
||
|
||
Tru64 checks the /etc/exports file every time there is a mount request so you
|
||
do not need to run the exportfs command; in fact on many versions of Tru64
|
||
Unix the command does not exist.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
8.3.2. Linux Servers and Tru64 Unix Clients
|
||
|
||
There are two issues to watch out for here. First, Tru64 Unix mounts using
|
||
Version 3 NFS by default. You will see mount errors if your Linux server does
|
||
not support Version 3 NFS. Second, in Tru64 Unix 4.x, NFS locking requests
|
||
are made by daemon. You will therefore need to specify the insecure_locks
|
||
option on all volumes you export to a Tru64 Unix 4.x client; see the exports
|
||
man pages for details.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
8.4. HP-UX
|
||
|
||
8.4.1. HP-UX Servers and Linux Clients
|
||
|
||
A sample /etc/exports entry on HP-UX looks like this:
|
||
/usr -ro,access=slave1.foo.com:slave2.foo.com
|
||
/home -rw=slave1.foo.com:slave2.fo.com:root=slave1.foo.com:slave2.foo.com
|
||
|
||
(The root option is listed in the last entry for informational purposes only;
|
||
its use is not recommended unless necessary.)
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
8.4.2. Linux Servers and HP-UX Clients
|
||
|
||
HP-UX diskless clients will require at least a kernel version 2.2.19 (or
|
||
patched 2.2.18) for device files to export correctly. Also, any exports to an
|
||
HP-UX client will need to be exported with the insecure_locks option.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
8.5. IRIX
|
||
|
||
8.5.1. IRIX Servers and Linux Clients
|
||
|
||
A sample /etc/exports entry on IRIX looks like this:
|
||
/usr -ro,access=slave1.foo.com:slave2.foo.com
|
||
/home -rw=slave1.foo.com:slave2.fo.com:root=slave1.foo.com:slave2.foo.com
|
||
|
||
(The root option is listed in the last entry for informational purposes only;
|
||
its use is not recommended unless necessary.)
|
||
|
||
There are reportedly problems when using the nohide option on exports to
|
||
linux 2.2-based systems. This problem is fixed in the 2.4 kernel. As a
|
||
workaround, you can export and mount lower-down file systems separately.
|
||
|
||
As of Kernel 2.4.17, there continue to be several minor interoperability
|
||
issues that may require a kernel upgrade. In particular:
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>Make sure that Trond Myklebust's seekdir (or dir) kernel patch is
|
||
applied. The latest version (for 2.4.17) is located at:
|
||
|
||
[http://www.fys.uio.no/~trondmy/src/2.4.17/linux-2.4.17-seekdir.dif]
|
||
http://www.fys.uio.no/~trondmy/src/2.4.17/linux-2.4.17-seekdir.dif
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>IRIX servers do not always use the same fsid attribute field across
|
||
reboots, which results in inode number mismatch errors on a Linux client
|
||
if the mounted IRIX server reboots. A patch is available from:
|
||
|
||
[http://www.geocrawler.com/lists/3/SourceForge/789/0/7777454/] http://
|
||
www.geocrawler.com/lists/3/SourceForge/789/0/7777454/
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>Linux kernels v2.4.9 and above have problems reading large directories
|
||
(hundreds of files) from exported IRIX XFS file systems that were made
|
||
with naming version=1. The reason for the problem can be found at:
|
||
|
||
[http://www.geocrawler.com/archives/3/789/2001/9/100/6531172/] http://
|
||
www.geocrawler.com/archives/3/789/2001/9/100/6531172/
|
||
|
||
The naming version can be found by using (on the IRIX server):
|
||
xfs_growfs -n mount_point
|
||
|
||
|
||
The workaround is to export these file systems using the -32bitclients
|
||
option in the /etc/exports file. The fix is to convert the file system to
|
||
'naming version=2'. Unfortunately the only way to do this is by a backup/
|
||
mkfs/restore.
|
||
|
||
mkfs_xfs on IRIX 6.5.14 (and above) creates naming version=2 XFS file
|
||
systems by default. On IRIX 6.5.5 to 6.5.13, use:
|
||
mkfs_xfs -n version=2 device
|
||
|
||
|
||
Versions of IRIX prior to 6.5.5 do not support naming version=2 XFS file
|
||
systems.
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
8.5.2. IRIX clients and Linux servers
|
||
|
||
Irix versions up to 6.5.12 have problems mounting file systems exported from
|
||
Linux boxes - the mount point "gets lost," e.g.,
|
||
# mount linux:/disk1 /mnt
|
||
# cd /mnt/xyz/abc
|
||
# pwd
|
||
/xyz/abc
|
||
|
||
|
||
This is known IRIX bug (SGI bug 815265 - IRIX not liking file handles of less
|
||
than 32 bytes), which is fixed in IRIX 6.5.13. If it is not possible to
|
||
upgrade to IRIX 6.5.13, then the unofficial workaround is to force the Linux
|
||
nfsd to always use 32 byte file handles.
|
||
|
||
A number of patches exist - see:
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>[http://www.geocrawler.com/archives/3/789/2001/8/50/6371896/] http://
|
||
www.geocrawler.com/archives/3/789/2001/8/50/6371896/
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>[http://oss.sgi.com/projects/xfs/mail_archive/0110/msg00006.html] http://
|
||
oss.sgi.com/projects/xfs/mail_archive/0110/msg00006.html
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
8.6. Solaris
|
||
|
||
8.6.1. Solaris Servers
|
||
|
||
Solaris has a slightly different format on the server end from other
|
||
operating systems. Instead of /etc/exports, the configuration file is /etc/
|
||
dfs/dfstab. Entries are of the form of a share command, where the syntax for
|
||
the example in Section 3 would look like
|
||
share -o rw=slave1,slave2 -d "Master Usr" /usr
|
||
|
||
and instead of running exportfs after editing, you run shareall.
|
||
|
||
Solaris servers are especially sensitive to packet size. If you are using a
|
||
Linux client with a Solaris server, be sure to set rsize and wsize to 32768
|
||
at mount time.
|
||
|
||
Finally, there is an issue with root squashing on Solaris: root gets mapped
|
||
to the user noone, which is not the same as the user nobody. If you are
|
||
having trouble with file permissions as root on the client machine, be sure
|
||
to check that the mapping works as you expect.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
8.6.2. Solaris Clients
|
||
|
||
Solaris clients will regularly produce the following message:
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|svc: unknown program 100227 (me 100003) |
|
||
| |
|
||
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|
||
This happens because Solaris clients, when they mount, try to obtain ACL
|
||
information - which Linux obviously does not have. The messages can safely be
|
||
ignored.
|
||
|
||
There are two known issues with diskless Solaris clients: First, a kernel
|
||
version of at least 2.2.19 is needed to get /dev/null to export correctly.
|
||
Second, the packet size may need to be set extremely small (i.e., 1024) on
|
||
diskless sparc clients because the clients do not know how to assemble
|
||
packets in reverse order. This can be done from /etc/bootparams on the
|
||
clients.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
8.7. SunOS
|
||
|
||
SunOS only has NFS Version 2 over UDP.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
8.7.1. SunOS Servers
|
||
|
||
On the server end, SunOS uses the most traditional format for its /etc/
|
||
exports file. The example in Section 3 would look like:
|
||
/usr -access=slave1.foo.com,slave2.foo.com
|
||
/home -rw=slave1.foo.com,slave2.foo.com, root=slave1.foo.com,slave2.foo.com
|
||
|
||
|
||
Again, the root option is listed for informational purposes and is not
|
||
recommended unless necessary.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
8.7.2. SunOS Clients
|
||
|
||
Be advised that SunOS makes all NFS locking requests as daemon, and therefore
|
||
you will need to add the insecure_locks option to any volumes you export to a
|
||
SunOS machine. See the exports man page for details.
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="NFS">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="Samba">
|
||
|
||
8.11. SAMBA - `NetBEUI', `NetBios', `CIFS' support.
|
||
|
||
SAMBA is an implementation of the Session Management Block protocol.
|
||
Samba allows Microsoft and other systems to mount and use your disks
|
||
and printers.
|
||
|
||
SAMBA and its configuration are covered in detail in the SMB-HOWTO.
|
||
|
||
5.2. Windows Environment
|
||
|
||
Samba is a suite of applications that allow most Unices (and in
|
||
particular Linux) to integrate into a Microsoft network both as a
|
||
client and a server. Acting as a server it allows Windows 95, Windows
|
||
for Workgroups, DOS and Windows NT clients to access Linux files and
|
||
printing services. It can completely replace Windows NT for file and
|
||
printing services, including the automatic downloading of printer
|
||
drivers to clients. Acting as a client allows the Linux workstation to
|
||
mount locally exported windows file shares.
|
||
|
||
According to the SAMBA Meta-FAQ:
|
||
|
||
"Many users report that compared to other SMB implementations Samba is more stable,
|
||
faster, and compatible with more clients. Administrators of some large installations say
|
||
that Samba is the only SMB server available which will scale to many tens of thousands
|
||
of users without crashing"
|
||
|
||
<20> Samba project home page <http://samba.anu.edu.au/samba/>
|
||
|
||
<20> SMB HOWTO <http://metalab.unc.edu/mdw/HOWTO/SMB-HOWTO.html>
|
||
|
||
<20> Printing HOWTO <http://metalab.unc.edu/mdw/HOWTO/Printing-
|
||
HOWTO.html>
|
||
|
||
<glossentry>
|
||
<glossterm>
|
||
samba
|
||
</glossterm>
|
||
<glossdef>
|
||
<para>
|
||
A LanManager like file and printer server for Unix. The Samba software suite is a collection of programs that implements the SMB protocol for unix systems, allowing you to serve files and printers to Windows, NT, OS/2 and DOS clients. This protocol is sometimes also referred to as the LanManager or NetBIOS protocol. This package contains all the components necessary to turn your Debian GNU/Linux box into a powerful file and printer server. Currently, the Samba Debian packages consist of the following: samba - A LanManager like file and printer server for Unix. samba-common - Samba common files used by both the server and the client. smbclient - A LanManager like simple client for Unix. swat - Samba Web Administration Tool samba-doc - Samba documentation. smbfs - Mount and umount commands for the smbfs (kernels 2.0.x and above). libpam-smbpass - pluggable authentication module for SMB password database libsmbclient - Shared library that allows applications to talk to SMB servers libsmbclient-dev - libsmbclient shared libraries winbind: Service to resolve user and group information from Windows NT servers It is possible to install a subset of these packages depending on your particular needs. For example, to access other SMB servers you should only need the smbclient and samba-common packages. From Debian 3.0r0 APT
|
||
<ulink url="http://www.tldp.org/LDP/Linux-Dictionary/html/index.html">http://www.tldp.org/LDP/Linux-Dictionary/html/index.html</ulink>
|
||
</para>
|
||
</glossdef>
|
||
</glossentry>
|
||
|
||
<glossentry>
|
||
<glossterm>
|
||
Samba
|
||
</glossterm>
|
||
<glossdef>
|
||
<para>
|
||
A lot of emphasis has been placed on peaceful coexistence between UNIX and Windows. Unfortunately, the two systems come from very different cultures and they have difficulty getting along without mediation. ...and that, of course, is Samba's job. Samba <http://samba.org/> runs on UNIX platforms, but speaks to Windows clients like a native. It allows a UNIX system to move into a Windows ``Network Neighborhood'' without causing a stir. Windows users can happily access file and print services without knowing or caring that those services are being offered by a UNIX host. All of this is managed through a protocol suite which is currently known as the ``Common Internet File System,'' or CIFS <http://www.cifs.com>. This name was introduced by Microsoft, and provides some insight into their hopes for the future. At the heart of CIFS is the latest incarnation of the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol, which has a long and tedious history. Samba is an open source CIFS implementation, and is available for free from the http://samba.org/ mirror sites. Samba and Windows are not the only ones to provide CIFS networking. OS/2 supports SMB file and print sharing, and there are commercial CIFS products for Macintosh and other platforms (including several others for UNIX). Samba has been ported to a variety of non-UNIX operating systems, including VMS, AmigaOS, and NetWare. CIFS is also supported on dedicated file server platforms from a variety of vendors. In other words, this stuff is all over the place. From Rute-Users-Guide
|
||
<ulink url="http://www.tldp.org/LDP/Linux-Dictionary/html/index.html">http://www.tldp.org/LDP/Linux-Dictionary/html/index.html</ulink>
|
||
</para>
|
||
</glossdef>
|
||
</glossentry>
|
||
|
||
<glossentry>
|
||
<glossterm>
|
||
Samba
|
||
</glossterm>
|
||
<glossdef>
|
||
<para>
|
||
Samba adds Windows-networking support to UNIX. Whereas NFS is the most popular protocol for sharing files among UNIX machines, SMB is the most popular protocol for sharing files among Windows machines. The Samba package adds the ability for UNIX systems to interact with Windows systems. Key point: The Samba package comprises the following: smbd The Samba service allowing other machines (often Windows) to read files from a UNIX machine. nmbd Provides support for NetBIOS. Logically, the SMB protocol is layered on top of NetBIOS, which is in turn layered on top of TCP/IP. smbmount An extension to the mount program that allows a UNIX machine to connect to another machine implicitly. Files can be accessed as if they were located on the local machines. smbclient Allows files to be access through SMB in an explicity manner. This is a command-line tool much like the FTP tool that allows files to be copied. Unlike smbmount, files cannot be accessed as if they were local. smb.conf The configuration file for Samba. From Hacking-Lexicon
|
||
<ulink url="http://www.tldp.org/LDP/Linux-Dictionary/html/index.html">http://www.tldp.org/LDP/Linux-Dictionary/html/index.html</ulink>
|
||
</para>
|
||
</glossdef>
|
||
</glossentry>
|
||
|
||
Samba Authenticated Gateway HOWTO
|
||
Ricardo Alexandre Mattar
|
||
v1.2, 2004-05-21
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="SAMBA">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="SSH">
|
||
|
||
<title>SSH</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
The Secure Shell, or SSH, provides a way of running command line and
|
||
graphical applications, and transferring files, over an encrypted
|
||
connection. SSH uses up to 2,048-bit encryption with a variety of
|
||
cryptographic schemes to make sure that if a cracker intercepts your
|
||
connection, all they can see is useless gibberish. It is both a
|
||
protocol and a suite of small command line applications which can be
|
||
used for various functions.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
SSH replaces the old Telnet application, and can be used for secure
|
||
remote administration of machines across the Internet. However, it
|
||
has more features.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
SSH increases the ease of running applications remotely by setting up
|
||
permissions automatically. If you can log into a machine, it allows you
|
||
to run a graphical application on it, unlike Telnet, which requires users
|
||
to type lots of geeky xhost and xauth commands. SSH also has inbuild
|
||
compression, which allows your graphic applications to run much faster
|
||
over the network.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
SCP (Secure Copy) and SFTP (Secure FTP) allow transfer of files over the
|
||
remote link, either via SSH's own command line utilities or graphical tools
|
||
like Gnome's GFTP. Like Telnet, SSH is cross-platform. You can find SSH
|
||
servers and clients for Linux, Unix, all flavours of Windows, BeOS, PalmOS,
|
||
Java and Embedded OSes used in routers.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Encrypted remote shell sessions are available through SSH
|
||
(http://www.ssh.fi/sshprotocols2/index.html
|
||
<http://www.ssh.fi/sshprotocols2/index.html>) thus effectively
|
||
allowing secure remote administration.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="SSH">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="Telnet">
|
||
|
||
<title>Telnet</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Created in the early 1970s, Telnet provides a method of running command
|
||
line applications on a remote computer as if that person were actually at
|
||
the remote site. Telnet is one of the most powerful tools for Unix, allowing
|
||
for true remote administration. It is also an interesting program from the
|
||
point of view of users, because it allows remote access to all their files
|
||
and programs from anywhere in the Internet. Combined with an X server (as
|
||
well as some rather arcane manipluation of authentication 'cookies' and
|
||
'DISPLAY' environment variables), there is no difference (apart from the
|
||
delay) between being at the console or on the other side of the planet.
|
||
However, since the 'telnet' protocol sends data 'en-clair' and there are
|
||
now more efficient protocols with features such as built-in
|
||
compression and 'tunneling' which allows for greater ease of usage of graphical
|
||
applications across the network as well as more secure connections it is an
|
||
effectively a dead protocol. Like the 'r' (such as rlogin and rsh) related
|
||
protocols it is still used though, within internal networks for the reasons
|
||
of ease of installation and use as well as backwards compatibility and also
|
||
as a means by which to configure networking devices such as routers
|
||
and firewalls.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Please consult RFC 854 for further details behind its implementation.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<20> Telnet related software
|
||
<http://metalab.unc.edu/pub/Linux/system/network/telnet/>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="Telnet">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="TFTP">
|
||
|
||
<title>TFTP</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP is a bare-bones protocol used by
|
||
devices that boot from the network. It is runs on top of UDP, so it
|
||
doesn't require a real TCP/IP stack. Misunderstanding: Many people
|
||
describe TFTP as simply a trivial version of FTP without authentication.
|
||
This misses the point. The purpose of TFTP is not to reduce the complexity
|
||
of file transfer, but to reduce the complexity of the underlying TCP/IP
|
||
stack so that it can fit inside boot ROMs. Key point: TFTP is almost
|
||
always used with BOOTP. BOOTP first configures the device, then TFTP
|
||
transfers the boot image named by BOOTP which is then used to boot the
|
||
device. Key point: Many systems come with unnecessary TFTP servers. Many
|
||
TFTP servers have bugs, like the backtracking problem or buffer overflows.
|
||
As a consequence, many systems can be exploited with TFTP even though
|
||
virtually nobody really uses it. Key point: A TFTP file transfer client
|
||
is built into many operating systems (UNIX, Windows, etc....). These clients
|
||
are often used to download rootkits when being broken into. Therefore,
|
||
removing the TFTP client should be part of your hardening procedure.
|
||
For further details on the TFTP protocol please see RFC's 1350, 1782,
|
||
1783, 1784, and 1785.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Most likely, you'll interface with the TFTP protocol using the TFTP command
|
||
line client, 'tftp', which allows users to transfer files to and from a
|
||
remote machine. The remote host may be specified on the command line, in
|
||
which case tftp uses host as the default host for future transfers.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Setting up TFTP is almost as easy as DHCP.
|
||
First install from the rpm package:
|
||
<screen>
|
||
# rpm -ihv tftp-server-*.rpm
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Create a directory for the files:
|
||
<screen>
|
||
# mkdir /tftpboot
|
||
# chown nobody:nobody /tftpboot
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
The directory /tftpboot is owned by user nobody, because this is the default
|
||
user id set up by tftpd to access the files. Edit the file /etc/xinetd.d/tftp
|
||
to look like the following:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
service tftp
|
||
{
|
||
socket_type = dgram
|
||
protocol = udp
|
||
wait = yes
|
||
user = root
|
||
server = /usr/sbin/in.tftpd
|
||
server_args = -c -s /tftpboot
|
||
disable = no
|
||
per_source = 11
|
||
cps = 100 2
|
||
}
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
The changes from the default file are the parameter disable = no (to enable
|
||
the service) and the server argument -c. This argument allows for the
|
||
creation of files, which is necessary if you want to save boot or disk
|
||
images. You may want to make TFTP read only in normal operation.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Then reload xinetd:
|
||
<screen>
|
||
/etc/rc.d/init.d/xinetd reload
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
You can use the tftp command, available from the tftp (client) rpm package,
|
||
to test the server. At the tftp prompt, you can issue the commands put and
|
||
get.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="TFTP">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="VNC">
|
||
|
||
<title>VNC</title>
|
||
|
||
8.13. Tunnelling, mobile IP and virtual private networks
|
||
|
||
The Linux kernel allows the tunnelling (encapsulation) of protocols.
|
||
It can do IPX tunnelling through IP, allowing the connection of two
|
||
IPX networks through an IP only link. It can also do IP-IP tunnelling,
|
||
which it is essential for mobile IP support, multicast support and
|
||
amateur radio. (see
|
||
http://metalab.unc.edu/mdw/HOWTO/NET3-4-HOWTO-6.html#ss6.8)
|
||
|
||
Mobile IP specifies enhancements that allow transparent routing of IP
|
||
datagrams to mobile nodes in the Internet. Each mobile node is always
|
||
identified by its home address, regardless of its current point of
|
||
attachment to the Internet. While situated away from its home, a
|
||
mobile node is also associated with a care-of address, which provides
|
||
information about its current point of attachment to the Internet.
|
||
The protocol provides for registering the care-of address with a home
|
||
agent. The home agent sends datagrams destined for the mobile node
|
||
through a tunnel to the care-of address. After arriving at the end of
|
||
the tunnel, each datagram is then delivered to the mobile node.
|
||
|
||
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a networking technology
|
||
that allows the use of the Internet as a secure virtual private
|
||
network (VPN). PPTP is integrated with the Remote Access Services
|
||
(RAS) server which is built into Windows NT Server. With PPTP, users
|
||
can dial into a local ISP, or connect directly to the Internet, and
|
||
access their network as if they were at their desks. PPTP is a closed
|
||
protocol and its security has recently being compromised. It is highly
|
||
recomendable to use other Linux based alternatives, since they rely on
|
||
open standards which have been carefully examined and tested.
|
||
|
||
|
||
<20> A client implementation of the PPTP for Linux is available here
|
||
<http://www.pdos.lcs.mit.edu/~cananian/Projects/PPTP/>
|
||
|
||
<20> More on Linux PPTP can be found here
|
||
<http://bmrc.berkeley.edu/people/chaffee/linux_pptp.html>
|
||
|
||
Mobile IP:
|
||
|
||
<20> http://www.hpl.hp.com/personal/Jean_Tourrilhes/MobileIP/mip.html
|
||
|
||
<20> http://metalab.unc.edu/mdw/HOWTO/NET3-4-HOWTO-6.html#ss6.12
|
||
|
||
Virtual Private Networks related documents:
|
||
|
||
|
||
<20> http://metalab.unc.edu/mdw/HOWTO/mini/VPN.html
|
||
|
||
<20> http://sites.inka.de/sites/bigred/devel/cipe.html
|
||
|
||
|
||
7.4. VNC
|
||
|
||
VNC stands for Virtual Network Computing. It is, in essence, a remote
|
||
display system which allows one to view a computing 'desktop'
|
||
environment not only on the machine where it is running, but from
|
||
anywhere on the Internet and from a wide variety of machine
|
||
architectures. Both clients and servers exist for Linux as well as for
|
||
many other platforms. It is possible to execute MS-Word in a Windows
|
||
NT or 95 machine and have the output displayed in a Linux machine. The
|
||
opposite is also true; it is possible to execute an application in a
|
||
Linux machine and have the output displayed in any other Linux or
|
||
Windows machine. One of the available clients is a Java applet,
|
||
allowing the remote display to be run inside a web browser. Another
|
||
client is a port for Linux using the SVGAlib graphics library,
|
||
allowing 386s with as little as 4 MB of RAM to become fully functional
|
||
X-Terminals.
|
||
|
||
<20> VNC web site <http://www.orl.co.uk/vnc/>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Virtual Network Computing (VNC) allows a user to operate a session running on another machine.
|
||
Although Linux and all other Unix-like OSes already have this functionality built in, VNC
|
||
provides further advantages because it's cross-platform, running on Linux, BSD, Unix, Win32,
|
||
MacOS, and PalmOS. This makes it far more versatile.
|
||
|
||
For example, let's assume the machine that you are attempting to connect to is running Linux.
|
||
You can use VNC to access applications running on that other Linux desktop. You can also use
|
||
VNC to provide technical support to users on Window's based machines by taking control of
|
||
their desktops from the comfort of your server room. VNC is usually installed as seperate
|
||
packages for the client and server, typically named 'vnc' and 'vnc-server'.
|
||
|
||
VNC uses screen numbers to connect clients to servers. This is because Unix machines allow
|
||
multiple graphical sessions to be stated simultaneously (check this out by logging in to a
|
||
virtual terminal and typing startx -- :1).
|
||
|
||
For platforms (Windows, MacOS, Palm, etc) which don't have this capability, you'll connect
|
||
to 'screen 0' and take over the session of the existing user. For Unix systems, you'll need
|
||
to specify a higher number and receive a new desktop.
|
||
|
||
If you prefer the Windows-style approach where the VNC client takes over the currently
|
||
running display, you can use x0rfbserver - see the sidebox below.
|
||
|
||
VNC Servers and Clients
|
||
|
||
On Linux, the VNC server (which allows the machine to be used remotely) is actually
|
||
run as a replacement X server. To be able to start a VNC session to a machine, log
|
||
into it and run vncserver. You'll be prompted for a password - in future you can
|
||
change this password with the vncpasswd command. After you enter the password, you'll
|
||
be told the display number of the newly created machine.
|
||
|
||
It is possible to control a remote macine by using the vncviewer command. If it is
|
||
typed on its own it will prompt for a remote machine, or you can use:
|
||
vncviewer [host]:[screen-number]
|
||
|
||
> The VPN HOWTO, deprecated!!!!
|
||
> VPN HOWTO
|
||
> Linux VPN Masquerade HOWTO
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
10. References
|
||
|
||
10.1. Web Sites
|
||
|
||
Cipe Home Page <http://sites.inka.de/~bigred/devel/cipe.html>
|
||
|
||
Masq Home Page <http://ipmasq.cjb.net>
|
||
|
||
Samba Home Page <http://samba.anu.edu.au>
|
||
|
||
Linux HQ <http://www.linuxhq.com> ---great site for lots of linux
|
||
info
|
||
|
||
10.2. Documentation
|
||
|
||
cipe.info: info file included with cipe distribution
|
||
|
||
Firewall HOWTO, by Mark Grennan, markg@netplus.net
|
||
|
||
IP Masquerade mini-HOWTO,by Ambrose Au, ambrose@writeme.com
|
||
|
||
IPChains-Howto, by Paul Russell, Paul.Russell@rustcorp.com.au
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="VNC">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="Web-Serving">
|
||
|
||
<title>Web-Serving</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
The World Wide Web provides a simple method of publishing and linking
|
||
information across the Internet, and is responsible for popularising
|
||
the Internet to its current level. In the simplest case, a Web client
|
||
(or browser), such as Netscape or Internet Explorer, connects with a
|
||
Web server using a simple request/response protocol called HTTP
|
||
(Hypertext Transfer Protocol), and requests HTML (Hypertext Markup
|
||
Language) pages, images, Flash and other objects.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
In mode modern situations, the Web server can also geneate pages
|
||
dynamically based on information returned from the user. Either way
|
||
setting up your own Web server is extremely simple. There are many
|
||
choices for Web serving under Linux. Some servers are very mature,
|
||
such as Apache, and are perfect for small and large sites alike.
|
||
Other servers programmed to be light and fast, and to have only a
|
||
limited feature set to reduce complexity. A search on freshmeat.net
|
||
will reveal a multitude of servers.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Most Linux distributions include Apache <http://www.apache.org>.
|
||
Apache is the number one server on the internet according to
|
||
http://www.netcraft.co.uk/survey/ . More than a half of all internet
|
||
sites are running Apache or one of it derivatives. Apache's advantages
|
||
include its modular design, stability and speed. Given the appropriate
|
||
hardware and configuration it can support the highest loads: Yahoo,
|
||
Altavista, GeoCities, and Hotmail are based on customized versions of
|
||
this server.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Optional support for SSL (which enables secure transactions) is also
|
||
available at:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<20> http://www.apache-ssl.org/
|
||
<20> http://raven.covalent.net/
|
||
<20> http://www.c2.net/
|
||
|
||
Dynamic Web content generation
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Web scripting languages are even more common on Linux than databases
|
||
- basically, every language is available. This includes CGI,
|
||
PHP 3 and 4, Perl, JSP, ASP (via closed source applications from
|
||
Chill!soft and Halycon Software) and ColdFusion.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
PHP is an open source scripting language designed to churn out
|
||
dynamically produced Web content ranging from databases to browsers.
|
||
This inludes not only HTML, but also graphics, Macromedia Flash and
|
||
XML-based information. The latest versions of PHP provide impressive
|
||
speed improvements, install easily from packages and can be set up
|
||
quickly. PHP is the most popular Apache module and is used by over
|
||
two million sites, including Amazon.com, US telco giant Sprint,
|
||
Xoom Networks and Lycos. And unlike most other server side scripting
|
||
languages, developers (or those that employ them) can add their own
|
||
functions into the source to improve it. Supported databases include
|
||
those in the Database serving section and most ODBC compliant
|
||
databases. The language itself borrows its structure from Perl and C.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<20> http://metalab.unc.edu/mdw/HOWTO/WWW-HOWTO.html
|
||
<20> http://metalab.unc.edu/mdw/HOWTO/Virtual-Services-HOWTO.html
|
||
<20> http://metalab.unc.edu/mdw/HOWTO/Intranet-Server-HOWTO.html
|
||
<20> Web servers for Linux
|
||
<http://www.linuxlinks.com/Software/Internet/WebServers/>
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="Web-Serving">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="X11">
|
||
|
||
<title>X11</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
The X Window System was developed at MIT in the late 1980s, rapidly
|
||
becoming the industry standard windowing system for Unix graphics
|
||
workstations. The software is freely available, very versatile, and is
|
||
suitable for a wide range of hardware platforms. Any X environment
|
||
consists of two distinct parts, the X server and one or more X
|
||
clients. It is important to realise the distinction between the server
|
||
and the client. The server controls the display directly and is
|
||
responsible for all input/output via the keyboard, mouse or display.
|
||
The clients, on the other hand, do not access the screen directly -
|
||
they communicate with the server, which handles all input and output.
|
||
It is the clients which do the "real" computing work - running
|
||
applications or whatever. The clients communicate with the server,
|
||
causing the server to open one or more windows to handle input and
|
||
output for that client.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
In short, the X Window System allows a user to log in into a remote
|
||
machine, execute a process (for example, open a web browser) and have
|
||
the output displayed on his own machine. Because the process is
|
||
actually being executed on the remote system, very little CPU power is
|
||
needed in the local one. Indeed, computers exist whose primary purpose
|
||
is to act as pure X servers. Such systems are called X terminals.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
A free port of the X Window System exists for Linux and can be found
|
||
at: Xfree <http://www.xfree86.org/>. It is included in most Linux
|
||
distributions.
|
||
<para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
For further information regarding X please see:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
X11, LBX, DXPC, NXServer, SSH, MAS
|
||
|
||
Related HOWTOs:
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD> Remote X Apps HOWTO
|
||
<EFBFBD> Linux XDMCP HOWTO
|
||
<EFBFBD> XDM and X Terminal mini-HOWTO
|
||
<EFBFBD> The Linux XFree86 HOWTO
|
||
<EFBFBD> ATI R200 + XFree86 4.x mini-HOWTO
|
||
<EFBFBD> Second Mouse in X mini-HOWTO
|
||
<EFBFBD> Linux Touch Screen HOWTO
|
||
<EFBFBD> XFree86 Video Timings HOWTO
|
||
<EFBFBD> Linux XFree-to-Xinside mini-HOWTO
|
||
<EFBFBD> XFree Local Multi-User HOWTO
|
||
<EFBFBD> Using Xinerama to MultiHead XFree86 V. 4.0+
|
||
<EFBFBD> Connecting X Terminals to Linux Mini-HOWTO
|
||
<EFBFBD> How to change the title of an xterm
|
||
<EFBFBD> X Window System Architecture Overview HOWTO
|
||
<EFBFBD> The X Window User HOWTO
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="X11">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="Email">
|
||
|
||
<title>Email</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Alongside the Web, mail is the top reason for the popularity of the Internet. Email is an inexpensive and fast method of time-shifted messaging which, much like the Web, is actually based around sending and receiving plain text files. The protocol used is called the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP). The server programs that implement SMTP to move mail from one server to another are called Mail Transfer Agents (MTAs).
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
In times gone by, users would Telnet into the SMTP server itself and use a command line program like elm or pine to check ther mail. These days, users run email clients like Netscape, Evolution, Kmail or Outlook on their desktop to check their email off a local SMTP server. Additional protocols like POP3 and IMAP4 are used between the SMTP server and desktop mail client to allow clients to manipulate files on, and download from, their local mail server. The programs that implement POP3 and IMAP4 are called Mail Delivery Agents (MDAs). They are generally separate from MTAs.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
* Linux Mail-Queue mini-HOWTO
|
||
|
||
* The Linux Mail User HOWTO
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="Email-Hosting">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="Proxy-Caching">
|
||
|
||
8.11. Proxy Server
|
||
|
||
The term proxy means "to do something on behalf of someone else." In
|
||
networking terms, a proxy server computer can act on the behalf of
|
||
several clients. An HTTP proxy is a machine that receives requests for
|
||
web pages from another machine (Machine A). The proxy gets the page
|
||
requested and returns the result to Machine A. The proxy may have a
|
||
cache with the requested pages, so if another machine asks for the
|
||
same page the copy in the cache will be returned instead. This allows
|
||
efficient use of bandwidth resources and less response time. As a side
|
||
effect, as client machines are not directly connected to the outside
|
||
world this is a way of securing the internal network. A well-
|
||
configured proxy can be as effective as a good firewall.
|
||
|
||
Several proxy servers exist for Linux. One popular solution is the
|
||
Apache proxy module. A more complete and robust implementation of an
|
||
HTTP proxy is SQUID.
|
||
<20> Apache <http://www.apache.org>
|
||
|
||
<20> Squid <http://squid.nlanr.net/>
|
||
|
||
<title>Proxy-Caching</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
When a web browser retreives information from the Internet, it stores a copy of that information
|
||
in a cache on the local machine. When a user requests that information in future, the browser will
|
||
check to seee if the original source has updated; if not, the browser will simply use the cached version
|
||
rather than fetch the data again.
|
||
|
||
By doing this, there is less information that needs to be downloadded, which makes the connection seem responsive
|
||
to users and reduces bandwidth costs.
|
||
|
||
But if there are many browsers accessing the Internet through the same connection, it makes better sense to have
|
||
a single, centralised cache so that once a single machine has requested some information, the next
|
||
machine to try and download that information can also access it more quickly. This is the
|
||
theory behind the proxy cache. Squid is by far the most popular cache used on the Web, and can also be used
|
||
to accelerate Web serving.
|
||
|
||
Although Squid is useful for an ISP, large businesses or even a small office can afford to use Squid to
|
||
speed up transfers and save money, and it can easily be used to the same effect in a home with a few
|
||
flatmates sharing a cable or ADSL connection.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
Traffic Control HOWTO
|
||
|
||
Version 1.0.1
|
||
|
||
Martin A. Brown
|
||
|
||
[http://www.securepipe.com/] SecurePipe, Inc.
|
||
Network Administration
|
||
|
||
<mabrown@securepipe.com>
|
||
|
||
"Nov 2003"
|
||
Revision History
|
||
Revision 1.0.1 2003-11-17 Revised by: MAB
|
||
Added link to Leonardo Balliache's documentation
|
||
Revision 1.0 2003-09-24 Revised by: MAB
|
||
reviewed and approved by TLDP
|
||
Revision 0.7 2003-09-14 Revised by: MAB
|
||
incremental revisions, proofreading, ready for TLDP
|
||
Revision 0.6 2003-09-09 Revised by: MAB
|
||
minor editing, corrections from Stef Coene
|
||
Revision 0.5 2003-09-01 Revised by: MAB
|
||
HTB section mostly complete, more diagrams, LARTC pre-release
|
||
Revision 0.4 2003-08-30 Revised by: MAB
|
||
added diagram
|
||
Revision 0.3 2003-08-29 Revised by: MAB
|
||
substantial completion of classless, software, rules, elements and components
|
||
sections
|
||
Revision 0.2 2003-08-23 Revised by: MAB
|
||
major work on overview, elements, components and software sections
|
||
Revision 0.1 2003-08-15 Revised by: MAB
|
||
initial revision (outline complete)
|
||
|
||
|
||
Traffic control encompasses the sets of mechanisms and operations by which
|
||
packets are queued for transmission/reception on a network interface. The
|
||
operations include enqueuing, policing, classifying, scheduling, shaping and
|
||
dropping. This HOWTO provides an introduction and overview of the
|
||
capabilities and implementation of traffic control under Linux.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD> 2003, Martin A. Brown
|
||
|
||
|
||
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
|
||
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any
|
||
later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
|
||
invariant sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, with no Back-Cover Text. A
|
||
copy of the license is located at [http://www.gnu.org/licenses/fdl.html]
|
||
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/fdl.html.
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
Table of Contents
|
||
1. Introduction to Linux Traffic Control
|
||
1.1. Target audience and assumptions about the reader
|
||
1.2. Conventions
|
||
1.3. Recommended approach
|
||
1.4. Missing content, corrections and feedback
|
||
|
||
|
||
2. Overview of Concepts
|
||
2.1. What is it?
|
||
2.2. Why use it?
|
||
2.3. Advantages
|
||
2.4. Disdvantages
|
||
2.5. Queues
|
||
2.6. Flows
|
||
2.7. Tokens and buckets
|
||
2.8. Packets and frames
|
||
|
||
|
||
3. Traditional Elements of Traffic Control
|
||
3.1. Shaping
|
||
3.2. Scheduling
|
||
3.3. Classifying
|
||
3.4. Policing
|
||
3.5. Dropping
|
||
3.6. Marking
|
||
|
||
|
||
4. Components of Linux Traffic Control
|
||
4.1. qdisc
|
||
4.2. class
|
||
4.3. filter
|
||
4.4. classifier
|
||
4.5. policer
|
||
4.6. drop
|
||
4.7. handle
|
||
|
||
|
||
5. Software and Tools
|
||
5.1. Kernel requirements
|
||
5.2. iproute2 tools (tc)
|
||
5.3. tcng, Traffic Control Next Generation
|
||
5.4. IMQ, Intermediate Queuing device
|
||
|
||
|
||
6. Classless Queuing Disciplines (qdiscs)
|
||
6.1. FIFO, First-In First-Out (pfifo and bfifo)
|
||
6.2. pfifo_fast, the default Linux qdisc
|
||
6.3. SFQ, Stochastic Fair Queuing
|
||
6.4. ESFQ, Extended Stochastic Fair Queuing
|
||
6.5. GRED, Generic Random Early Drop
|
||
6.6. TBF, Token Bucket Filter
|
||
|
||
|
||
7. Classful Queuing Disciplines (qdiscs)
|
||
7.1. HTB, Hierarchical Token Bucket
|
||
7.2. PRIO, priority scheduler
|
||
7.3. CBQ, Class Based Queuing
|
||
|
||
|
||
8. Rules, Guidelines and Approaches
|
||
8.1. General Rules of Linux Traffic Control
|
||
8.2. Handling a link with a known bandwidth
|
||
8.3. Handling a link with a variable (or unknown) bandwidth
|
||
8.4. Sharing/splitting bandwidth based on flows
|
||
8.5. Sharing/splitting bandwidth based on IP
|
||
|
||
|
||
9. Scripts for use with QoS/Traffic Control
|
||
9.1. wondershaper
|
||
9.2. ADSL Bandwidth HOWTO script (myshaper)
|
||
9.3. htb.init
|
||
9.4. tcng.init
|
||
9.5. cbq.init
|
||
|
||
|
||
10. Diagram
|
||
10.1. General diagram
|
||
|
||
|
||
11. Annotated Traffic Control Links
|
||
|
||
1. Introduction to Linux Traffic Control
|
||
|
||
Linux offers a very rich set of tools for managing and manipulating the
|
||
transmission of packets. The larger Linux community is very familiar with the
|
||
tools available under Linux for packet mangling and firewalling (netfilter,
|
||
and before that, ipchains) as well as hundreds of network services which can
|
||
run on the operating system. Few inside the community and fewer outside the
|
||
Linux community are aware of the tremendous power of the traffic control
|
||
subsystem which has grown and matured under kernels 2.2 and 2.4.
|
||
|
||
This HOWTO purports to introduce the concepts of traffic control, the
|
||
traditional elements (in general), the components of the Linux traffic
|
||
control implementation and provide some guidelines . This HOWTO represents
|
||
the collection, amalgamation and synthesis of the [http://lartc.org/howto/]
|
||
LARTC HOWTO, documentation from individual projects and importantly the LARTC
|
||
mailing list over a period of study.
|
||
|
||
The impatient soul, who simply wishes to experiment right now, is
|
||
recommended to the [http://tldp.org/HOWTO/Traffic-Control-tcng-HTB-HOWTO/]
|
||
Traffic Control using tcng and HTB HOWTO and [http://lartc.org/howto/] LARTC
|
||
HOWTO for immediate satisfaction.
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
1.1. Target audience and assumptions about the reader
|
||
|
||
The target audience for this HOWTO is the network administrator or savvy
|
||
home user who desires an introduction to the field of traffic control and an
|
||
overview of the tools available under Linux for implementing traffic control.
|
||
|
||
I assume that the reader is comfortable with UNIX concepts and the command
|
||
line and has a basic knowledge of IP networking. Users who wish to implement
|
||
traffic control may require the ability to patch, compile and install a
|
||
kernel or software package [1]. For users with newer kernels (2.4.20+, see
|
||
also Section 5.1), however, the ability to install and use software may be
|
||
all that is required.
|
||
|
||
Broadly speaking, this HOWTO was written with a sophisticated user in mind,
|
||
perhaps one who has already had experience with traffic control under Linux.
|
||
I assume that the reader may have no prior traffic control experience.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
1.2. Conventions
|
||
|
||
This text was written in [http://www.docbook.org/] DocBook ([http://
|
||
www.docbook.org/xml/4.2/index.html] version 4.2) with vim. All formatting has
|
||
been applied by [http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT/] xsltproc based on DocBook XSL and
|
||
LDP XSL stylesheets. Typeface formatting and display conventions are similar
|
||
to most printed and electronically distributed technical documentation.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
1.3. Recommended approach
|
||
|
||
I strongly recommend to the eager reader making a first foray into the
|
||
discipline of traffic control, to become only casually familiar with the tc
|
||
command line utility, before concentrating on tcng. The tcng software package
|
||
defines an entire language for describing traffic control structures. At
|
||
first, this language may seem daunting, but mastery of these basics will
|
||
quickly provide the user with a much wider ability to employ (and deploy)
|
||
traffic control configurations than the direct use of tc would afford.
|
||
|
||
Where possible, I'll try to prefer describing the behaviour of the Linux
|
||
traffic control system in an abstract manner, although in many cases I'll
|
||
need to supply the syntax of one or the other common systems for defining
|
||
these structures. I may not supply examples in both the tcng language and the
|
||
tc command line, so the wise user will have some familiarity with both.
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
1.4. Missing content, corrections and feedback
|
||
|
||
There is content yet missing from this HOWTO. In particular, the following
|
||
items will be added at some point to this documentation.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> A description and diagram of GRED, WRR, PRIO and CBQ.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> A section of examples.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> A section detailing the classifiers.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> A section discussing the techniques for measuring traffic.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> A section covering meters.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> More details on tcng.
|
||
|
||
|
||
I welcome suggestions, corrections and feedback at <mabrown@securepipe.com
|
||
>. All errors and omissions are strictly my fault. Although I have made every
|
||
effort to verify the factual correctness of the content presented herein, I
|
||
cannot accept any responsibility for actions taken under the influence of
|
||
this documentation.
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
2. Overview of Concepts
|
||
|
||
This section will introduce traffic control and examine reasons for it,
|
||
identify a few advantages and disadvantages and introduce key concepts used
|
||
in traffic control.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
2.1. What is it?
|
||
|
||
Traffic control is the name given to the sets of queuing systems and
|
||
mechanisms by which packets are received and transmitted on a router. This
|
||
includes deciding which (and whether) packets to accept at what rate on the
|
||
input of an interface and determining which packets to transmit in what order
|
||
at what rate on the output of an interface.
|
||
|
||
In the overwhelming majority of situations, traffic control consists of a
|
||
single queue which collects entering packets and dequeues them as quickly as
|
||
the hardware (or underlying device) can accept them. This sort of queue is a
|
||
FIFO.
|
||
|
||
Note The default qdisc under Linux is the pfifo_fast, which is slightly more
|
||
complex than the FIFO.
|
||
|
||
There are examples of queues in all sorts of software. The queue is a way
|
||
of organizing the pending tasks or data (see also Section 2.5). Because
|
||
network links typically carry data in a serialized fashion, a queue is
|
||
required to manage the outbound data packets.
|
||
|
||
In the case of a desktop machine and an efficient webserver sharing the
|
||
same uplink to the Internet, the following contention for bandwidth may
|
||
occur. The web server may be able to fill up the output queue on the router
|
||
faster than the data can be transmitted across the link, at which point the
|
||
router starts to drop packets (its buffer is full!). Now, the desktop machine
|
||
(with an interactive application user) may be faced with packet loss and high
|
||
latency. Note that high latency sometimes leads to screaming users! By
|
||
separating the internal queues used to service these two different classes of
|
||
application, there can be better sharing of the network resource between the
|
||
two applications.
|
||
|
||
Traffic control is the set of tools which allows the user to have granular
|
||
control over these queues and the queuing mechanisms of a networked device.
|
||
The power to rearrange traffic flows and packets with these tools is
|
||
tremendous and can be complicated, but is no substitute for adequate
|
||
bandwidth.
|
||
|
||
The term Quality of Service (QoS) is often used as a synonym for traffic
|
||
control.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
2.2. Why use it?
|
||
|
||
Packet-switched networks differ from circuit based networks in one very
|
||
important regard. A packet-switched network itself is stateless. A
|
||
circuit-based network (such as a telephone network) must hold state within
|
||
the network. IP networks are stateless and packet-switched networks by
|
||
design; in fact, this statelessness is one of the fundamental strengths of
|
||
IP.
|
||
|
||
The weakness of this statelessness is the lack of differentiation between
|
||
types of flows. In simplest terms, traffic control allows an administrator to
|
||
queue packets differently based on attributes of the packet. It can even be
|
||
used to simulate the behaviour of a circuit-based network. This introduces
|
||
statefulness into the stateless network.
|
||
|
||
There are many practical reasons to consider traffic control, and many
|
||
scenarios in which using traffic control makes sense. Below are some examples
|
||
of common problems which can be solved or at least ameliorated with these
|
||
tools.
|
||
|
||
The list below is not an exhaustive list of the sorts of solutions
|
||
available to users of traffic control, but introduces the types of problems
|
||
that can be solved by using traffic control to maximize the usability of a
|
||
network connection.
|
||
|
||
Common traffic control solutions
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> Limit total bandwidth to a known rate; TBF, HTB with child class(es).
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> Limit the bandwidth of a particular user, service or client; HTB
|
||
classes and classifying with a filter. traffic.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> Maximize TCP throughput on an asymmetric link; prioritize transmission
|
||
of ACK packets, wondershaper.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> Reserve bandwidth for a particular application or user; HTB with
|
||
children classes and classifying.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> Prefer latency sensitive traffic; PRIO inside an HTB class.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> Managed oversubscribed bandwidth; HTB with borrowing.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> Allow equitable distribution of unreserved bandwidth; HTB with
|
||
borrowing.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> Ensure that a particular type of traffic is dropped; policer attached
|
||
to a filter with a drop action.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Remember, too that sometimes, it is simply better to purchase more
|
||
bandwidth. Traffic control does not solve all problems!
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
2.3. Advantages
|
||
|
||
When properly employed, traffic control should lead to more predictable
|
||
usage of network resources and less volatile contention for these resources.
|
||
The network then meets the goals of the traffic control configuration. Bulk
|
||
download traffic can be allocated a reasonable amount of bandwidth even as
|
||
higher priority interactive traffic is simultaneously serviced. Even low
|
||
priority data transfer such as mail can be allocated bandwidth without
|
||
tremendously affecting the other classes of traffic.
|
||
|
||
In a larger picture, if the traffic control configuration represents policy
|
||
which has been communicated to the users, then users (and, by extension,
|
||
applications) know what to expect from the network.
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
2.4. Disdvantages
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Complexity is easily one of the most significant disadvantages of using
|
||
traffic control. There are ways to become familiar with traffic control tools
|
||
which ease the learning curve about traffic control and its mechanisms, but
|
||
identifying a traffic control misconfiguration can be quite a challenge.
|
||
|
||
Traffic control when used appropriately can lead to more equitable
|
||
distribution of network resources. It can just as easily be installed in an
|
||
inappropriate manner leading to further and more divisive contention for
|
||
resources.
|
||
|
||
The computing resources required on a router to support a traffic control
|
||
scenario need to be capable of handling the increased cost of maintaining the
|
||
traffic control structures. Fortunately, this is a small incremental cost,
|
||
but can become more significant as the configuration grows in size and
|
||
complexity.
|
||
|
||
For personal use, there's no training cost associated with the use of
|
||
traffic control, but a company may find that purchasing more bandwidth is a
|
||
simpler solution than employing traffic control. Training employees and
|
||
ensuring depth of knowledge may be more costly than investing in more
|
||
bandwidth.
|
||
|
||
Although traffic control on packet-switched networks covers a larger
|
||
conceptual area, you can think of traffic control as a way to provide [some
|
||
of] the statefulness of a circuit-based network to a packet-switched network.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
2.5. Queues
|
||
|
||
Queues form the backdrop for all of traffic control and are the integral
|
||
concept behind scheduling. A queue is a location (or buffer) containing a
|
||
finite number of items waiting for an action or service. In networking, a
|
||
queue is the place where packets (our units) wait to be transmitted by the
|
||
hardware (the service). In the simplest model, packets are transmitted in a
|
||
first-come first-serve basis [2]. In the discipline of computer networking
|
||
(and more generally computer science), this sort of a queue is known as a
|
||
FIFO.
|
||
|
||
Without any other mechanisms, a queue doesn't offer any promise for traffic
|
||
control. There are only two interesting actions in a queue. Anything entering
|
||
a queue is enqueued into the queue. To remove an item from a queue is to
|
||
dequeue that item.
|
||
|
||
A queue becomes much more interesting when coupled with other mechanisms
|
||
which can delay packets, rearrange, drop and prioritize packets in multiple
|
||
queues. A queue can also use subqueues, which allow for complexity of
|
||
behaviour in a scheduling operation.
|
||
|
||
From the perspective of the higher layer software, a packet is simply
|
||
enqueued for transmission, and the manner and order in which the enqueued
|
||
packets are transmitted is immaterial to the higher layer. So, to the higher
|
||
layer, the entire traffic control system may appear as a single queue [3]. It
|
||
is only by examining the internals of this layer that the traffic control
|
||
structures become exposed and available.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
2.6. Flows
|
||
|
||
A flow is a distinct connection or conversation between two hosts. Any
|
||
unique set of packets between two hosts can be regarded as a flow. Under TCP
|
||
the concept of a connection with a source IP and port and destination IP and
|
||
port represents a flow. A UDP flow can be similarly defined.
|
||
|
||
Traffic control mechanisms frequently separate traffic into classes of
|
||
flows which can be aggregated and transmitted as an aggregated flow (consider
|
||
DiffServ). Alternate mechanisms may attempt to divide bandwidth equally based
|
||
on the individual flows.
|
||
|
||
Flows become important when attempting to divide bandwidth equally among a
|
||
set of competing flows, especially when some applications deliberately build
|
||
a large number of flows.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
2.7. Tokens and buckets
|
||
|
||
Two of the key underpinnings of a shaping mechanisms are the interrelated
|
||
concepts of tokens and buckets.
|
||
|
||
In order to control the rate of dequeuing, an implementation can count the
|
||
number of packets or bytes dequeued as each item is dequeued, although this
|
||
requires complex usage of timers and measurements to limit accurately.
|
||
Instead of calculating the current usage and time, one method, used widely in
|
||
traffic control, is to generate tokens at a desired rate, and only dequeue
|
||
packets or bytes if a token is available.
|
||
|
||
Consider the analogy of an amusement park ride with a queue of people
|
||
waiting to experience the ride. Let's imagine a track on which carts traverse
|
||
a fixed track. The carts arrive at the head of the queue at a fixed rate. In
|
||
order to enjoy the ride, each person must wait for an available cart. The
|
||
cart is analogous to a token and the person is analogous to a packet. Again,
|
||
this mechanism is a rate-limiting or shaping mechanism. Only a certain number
|
||
of people can experience the ride in a particular period.
|
||
|
||
To extend the analogy, imagine an empty line for the amusement park ride
|
||
and a large number of carts sitting on the track ready to carry people. If a
|
||
large number of people entered the line together many (maybe all) of them
|
||
could experience the ride because of the carts available and waiting. The
|
||
number of carts available is a concept analogous to the bucket. A bucket
|
||
contains a number of tokens and can use all of the tokens in bucket without
|
||
regard for passage of time.
|
||
|
||
And to complete the analogy, the carts on the amusement park ride (our
|
||
tokens) arrive at a fixed rate and are only kept available up to the size of
|
||
the bucket. So, the bucket is filled with tokens according to the rate, and
|
||
if the tokens are not used, the bucket can fill up. If tokens are used the
|
||
bucket will not fill up. Buckets are a key concept in supporting bursty
|
||
traffic such as HTTP.
|
||
|
||
The TBF qdisc is a classical example of a shaper (the section on TBF
|
||
includes a diagram which may help to visualize the token and bucket
|
||
concepts). The TBF generates rate tokens and only transmits packets when a
|
||
token is available. Tokens are a generic shaping concept.
|
||
|
||
In the case that a queue does not need tokens immediately, the tokens can
|
||
be collected until they are needed. To collect tokens indefinitely would
|
||
negate any benefit of shaping so tokens are collected until a certain number
|
||
of tokens has been reached. Now, the queue has tokens available for a large
|
||
number of packets or bytes which need to be dequeued. These intangible tokens
|
||
are stored in an intangible bucket, and the number of tokens that can be
|
||
stored depends on the size of the bucket.
|
||
|
||
This also means that a bucket full of tokens may be available at any
|
||
instant. Very predictable regular traffic can be handled by small buckets.
|
||
Larger buckets may be required for burstier traffic, unless one of the
|
||
desired goals is to reduce the burstiness of the flows.
|
||
|
||
In summary, tokens are generated at rate, and a maximum of a bucket's worth
|
||
of tokens may be collected. This allows bursty traffic to be handled, while
|
||
smoothing and shaping the transmitted traffic.
|
||
|
||
The concepts of tokens and buckets are closely interrelated and are used in
|
||
both TBF (one of the classless qdiscs) and HTB (one of the classful qdiscs).
|
||
Within the tcng language, the use of two- and three-color meters is
|
||
indubitably a token and bucket concept.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
2.8. Packets and frames
|
||
|
||
The terms for data sent across network changes depending on the layer the
|
||
user is examining. This document will rather impolitely (and incorrectly)
|
||
gloss over the technical distinction between packets and frames although they
|
||
are outlined here.
|
||
|
||
The word frame is typically used to describe a layer 2 (data link) unit of
|
||
data to be forwarded to the next recipient. Ethernet interfaces, PPP
|
||
interfaces, and T1 interfaces all name their layer 2 data unit a frame. The
|
||
frame is actually the unit on which traffic control is performed.
|
||
|
||
A packet, on the other hand, is a higher layer concept, representing layer
|
||
3 (network) units. The term packet is preferred in this documentation,
|
||
although it is slightly inaccurate.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
3. Traditional Elements of Traffic Control
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
3.1. Shaping
|
||
|
||
Shapers delay packets to meet a desired rate.
|
||
|
||
Shaping is the mechanism by which packets are delayed before transmission
|
||
in an output queue to meet a desired output rate. This is one of the most
|
||
common desires of users seeking bandwidth control solutions. The act of
|
||
delaying a packet as part of a traffic control solution makes every shaping
|
||
mechanism into a non-work-conserving mechanism, meaning roughly: "Work is
|
||
required in order to delay packets."
|
||
|
||
Viewed in reverse, a non-work-conserving queuing mechanism is performing a
|
||
shaping function. A work-conserving queuing mechanism (see PRIO) would not be
|
||
capable of delaying a packet.
|
||
|
||
Shapers attempt to limit or ration traffic to meet but not exceed a
|
||
configured rate (frequently measured in packets per second or bits/bytes per
|
||
second). As a side effect, shapers can smooth out bursty traffic [4]. One of
|
||
the advantages of shaping bandwidth is the ability to control latency of
|
||
packets. The underlying mechanism for shaping to a rate is typically a token
|
||
and bucket mechanism. See also Section 2.7 for further detail on tokens and
|
||
buckets.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
3.2. Scheduling
|
||
|
||
Schedulers arrange and/or rearrange packets for output.
|
||
|
||
Scheduling is the mechanism by which packets are arranged (or rearranged)
|
||
between input and output of a particular queue. The overwhelmingly most
|
||
common scheduler is the FIFO (first-in first-out) scheduler. From a larger
|
||
perspective, any set of traffic control mechanisms on an output queue can be
|
||
regarded as a scheduler, because packets are arranged for output.
|
||
|
||
Other generic scheduling mechanisms attempt to compensate for various
|
||
networking conditions. A fair queuing algorithm (see SFQ) attempts to prevent
|
||
any single client or flow from dominating the network usage. A round-robin
|
||
algorithm (see WRR) gives each flow or client a turn to dequeue packets.
|
||
Other sophisticated scheduling algorithms attempt to prevent backbone
|
||
overload (see GRED) or refine other scheduling mechanisms (see ESFQ).
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
3.3. Classifying
|
||
|
||
Classifiers sort or separate traffic into queues.
|
||
|
||
Classifying is the mechanism by which packets are separated for different
|
||
treatment, possibly different output queues. During the process of accepting,
|
||
routing and transmitting a packet, a networking device can classify the
|
||
packet a number of different ways. Classification can include marking the
|
||
packet, which usually happens on the boundary of a network under a single
|
||
administrative control or classification can occur on each hop individually.
|
||
|
||
The Linux model (see Section 4.3) allows for a packet to cascade across a
|
||
series of classifiers in a traffic control structure and to be classified in
|
||
conjunction with policers (see also Section 4.5).
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
3.4. Policing
|
||
|
||
Policers measure and limit traffic in a particular queue.
|
||
|
||
Policing, as an element of traffic control, is simply a mechanism by which
|
||
traffic can be limited. Policing is most frequently used on the network
|
||
border to ensure that a peer is not consuming more than its allocated
|
||
bandwidth. A policer will accept traffic to a certain rate, and then perform
|
||
an action on traffic exceeding this rate. A rather harsh solution is to drop
|
||
the traffic, although the traffic could be reclassified instead of being
|
||
dropped.
|
||
|
||
A policer is a yes/no question about the rate at which traffic is entering
|
||
a queue. If the packet is about to enter a queue below a given rate, take one
|
||
action (allow the enqueuing). If the packet is about to enter a queue above a
|
||
given rate, take another action. Although the policer uses a token bucket
|
||
mechanism internally, it does not have the capability to delay a packet as a
|
||
shaping mechanism does.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
3.5. Dropping
|
||
|
||
Dropping discards an entire packet, flow or classification.
|
||
|
||
Dropping a packet is a mechanism by which a packet is discarded.
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
3.6. Marking
|
||
|
||
Marking is a mechanism by which the packet is altered.
|
||
|
||
Note This is not fwmark. The iptablestarget MARKand the ipchains--markare
|
||
used to modify packet metadata, not the packet itself.
|
||
|
||
Traffic control marking mechanisms install a DSCP on the packet itself,
|
||
which is then used and respected by other routers inside an administrative
|
||
domain (usually for DiffServ).
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
4. Components of Linux Traffic Control
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Table 1. Correlation between traffic control elements and Linux components
|
||
+-------------------+-------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|traditional element|Linux component |
|
||
+-------------------+-------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|shaping |The class offers shaping capabilities. |
|
||
+-------------------+-------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|scheduling |A qdisc is a scheduler. Schedulers can be simple such |
|
||
| |as the FIFO or complex, containing classes and other |
|
||
| |qdiscs, such as HTB. |
|
||
+-------------------+-------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|classifying |The filter object performs the classification through |
|
||
| |the agency of a classifier object. Strictly speaking, |
|
||
| |Linux classifiers cannot exist outside of a filter. |
|
||
+-------------------+-------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|policing |A policer exists in the Linux traffic control |
|
||
| |implementation only as part of a filter. |
|
||
+-------------------+-------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|dropping |To drop traffic requires a filter with a policer which |
|
||
| |uses "drop" as an action. |
|
||
+-------------------+-------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
|marking |The dsmark qdisc is used for marking. |
|
||
+-------------------+-------------------------------------------------------+
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
4.1. qdisc
|
||
|
||
Simply put, a qdisc is a scheduler (Section 3.2). Every output interface
|
||
needs a scheduler of some kind, and the default scheduler is a FIFO. Other
|
||
qdiscs available under Linux will rearrange the packets entering the
|
||
scheduler's queue in accordance with that scheduler's rules.
|
||
|
||
The qdisc is the major building block on which all of Linux traffic control
|
||
is built, and is also called a queuing discipline.
|
||
|
||
The classful qdiscs can contain classes, and provide a handle to which to
|
||
attach filters. There is no prohibition on using a classful qdisc without
|
||
child classes, although this will usually consume cycles and other system
|
||
resources for no benefit.
|
||
|
||
The classless qdiscs can contain no classes, nor is it possible to attach
|
||
filter to a classless qdisc. Because a classless qdisc contains no children
|
||
of any kind, there is no utility to classifying. This means that no filter
|
||
can be attached to a classless qdisc.
|
||
|
||
A source of terminology confusion is the usage of the terms root qdisc and
|
||
ingress qdisc. These are not really queuing disciplines, but rather locations
|
||
onto which traffic control structures can be attached for egress (outbound
|
||
traffic) and ingress (inbound traffic).
|
||
|
||
Each interface contains both. The primary and more common is the egress
|
||
qdisc, known as the root qdisc. It can contain any of the queuing disciplines
|
||
(qdiscs) with potential classes and class structures. The overwhelming
|
||
majority of documentation applies to the root qdisc and its children. Traffic
|
||
transmitted on an interface traverses the egress or root qdisc.
|
||
|
||
For traffic accepted on an interface, the ingress qdisc is traversed. With
|
||
its limited utility, it allows no child class to be created, and only exists
|
||
as an object onto which a filter can be attached. For practical purposes, the
|
||
ingress qdisc is merely a convenient object onto which to attach a policer to
|
||
limit the amount of traffic accepted on a network interface.
|
||
|
||
In short, you can do much more with an egress qdisc because it contains a
|
||
real qdisc and the full power of the traffic control system. An ingress qdisc
|
||
can only support a policer. The remainder of the documentation will concern
|
||
itself with traffic control structures attached to the root qdisc unless
|
||
otherwise specified.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
4.2. class
|
||
|
||
Classes only exist inside a classful qdisc (e.g., HTB and CBQ). Classes are
|
||
immensely flexible and can always contain either multiple children classes or
|
||
a single child qdisc [5]. There is no prohibition against a class containing
|
||
a classful qdisc itself, which facilitates tremendously complex traffic
|
||
control scenarios.
|
||
|
||
Any class can also have an arbitrary number of filters attached to it,
|
||
which allows the selection of a child class or the use of a filter to
|
||
reclassify or drop traffic entering a particular class.
|
||
|
||
A leaf class is a terminal class in a qdisc. It contains a qdisc (default
|
||
FIFO) and will never contain a child class. Any class which contains a child
|
||
class is an inner class (or root class) and not a leaf class.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
4.3. filter
|
||
|
||
The filter is the most complex component in the Linux traffic control
|
||
system. The filter provides a convenient mechanism for gluing together
|
||
several of the key elements of traffic control. The simplest and most obvious
|
||
role of the filter is to classify (see Section 3.3) packets. Linux filters
|
||
allow the user to classify packets into an output queue with either several
|
||
different filters or a single filter.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> A filter must contain a classifier phrase.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> A filter may contain a policer phrase.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Filters can be attached either to classful qdiscs or to classes, however
|
||
the enqueued packet always enters the root qdisc first. After the filter
|
||
attached to the root qdisc has been traversed, the packet may be directed to
|
||
any subclasses (which can have their own filters) where the packet may
|
||
undergo further classification.
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
4.4. classifier
|
||
|
||
Filter objects, which can be manipulated using tc, can use several
|
||
different classifying mechanisms, the most common of which is the u32
|
||
classifier. The u32 classifier allows the user to select packets based on
|
||
attributes of the packet.
|
||
|
||
The classifiers are tools which can be used as part of a filter to identify
|
||
characteristics of a packet or a packet's metadata. The Linux classfier
|
||
object is a direct analogue to the basic operation and elemental mechanism of
|
||
traffic control classifying.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
4.5. policer
|
||
|
||
This elemental mechanism is only used in Linux traffic control as part of a
|
||
filter. A policer calls one action above and another action below the
|
||
specified rate. Clever use of policers can simulate a three-color meter. See
|
||
also Section 10.
|
||
|
||
Although both policing and shaping are basic elements of traffic control
|
||
for limiting bandwidth usage a policer will never delay traffic. It can only
|
||
perform an action based on specified criteria. See also Example 5.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
4.6. drop
|
||
|
||
This basic traffic control mechanism is only used in Linux traffic control
|
||
as part of a policer. Any policer attached to any filter could have a drop
|
||
action.
|
||
|
||
Note The only place in the Linux traffic control system where a packet can be
|
||
explicitly dropped is a policer. A policer can limit packets enqueued at
|
||
a specific rate, or it can be configured to drop all traffic matching a
|
||
particular pattern [6].
|
||
|
||
There are, however, places within the traffic control system where a packet
|
||
may be dropped as a side effect. For example, a packet will be dropped if the
|
||
scheduler employed uses this method to control flows as the GRED does.
|
||
|
||
Also, a shaper or scheduler which runs out of its allocated buffer space
|
||
may have to drop a packet during a particularly bursty or overloaded period.
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
4.7. handle
|
||
|
||
Every class and classful qdisc (see also Section 7) requires a unique
|
||
identifier within the traffic control structure. This unique identifier is
|
||
known as a handle and has two constituent members, a major number and a minor
|
||
number. These numbers can be assigned arbitrarily by the user in accordance
|
||
with the following rules [7].
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
The numbering of handles for classes and qdiscs
|
||
|
||
major
|
||
This parameter is completely free of meaning to the kernel. The user
|
||
may use an arbitrary numbering scheme, however all objects in the traffic
|
||
control structure with the same parent must share a major handle number.
|
||
Conventional numbering schemes start at 1 for objects attached directly
|
||
to the root qdisc.
|
||
|
||
minor
|
||
This parameter unambiguously identifies the object as a qdisc if minor
|
||
is 0. Any other value identifies the object as a class. All classes
|
||
sharing a parent must have unique minor numbers.
|
||
|
||
|
||
The special handle ffff:0 is reserved for the ingress qdisc.
|
||
|
||
The handle is used as the target in classid and flowid phrases of tc filter
|
||
statements. These handles are external identifiers for the objects, usable by
|
||
userland applications. The kernel maintains internal identifiers for each
|
||
object.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
5. Software and Tools
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
5.1. Kernel requirements
|
||
|
||
Many distributions provide kernels with modular or monolithic support for
|
||
traffic control (Quality of Service). Custom kernels may not already provide
|
||
support (modular or not) for the required features. If not, this is a very
|
||
brief listing of the required kernel options.
|
||
|
||
The user who has little or no experience compiling a kernel is recommended
|
||
to Kernel HOWTO. Experienced kernel compilers should be able to determine
|
||
which of the below options apply to the desired configuration, after reading
|
||
a bit more about traffic control and planning.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Example 1. Kernel compilation options [8]
|
||
#
|
||
# QoS and/or fair queueing
|
||
#
|
||
CONFIG_NET_SCHED=y
|
||
CONFIG_NET_SCH_CBQ=m
|
||
CONFIG_NET_SCH_HTB=m
|
||
CONFIG_NET_SCH_CSZ=m
|
||
CONFIG_NET_SCH_PRIO=m
|
||
CONFIG_NET_SCH_RED=m
|
||
CONFIG_NET_SCH_SFQ=m
|
||
CONFIG_NET_SCH_TEQL=m
|
||
CONFIG_NET_SCH_TBF=m
|
||
CONFIG_NET_SCH_GRED=m
|
||
CONFIG_NET_SCH_DSMARK=m
|
||
CONFIG_NET_SCH_INGRESS=m
|
||
CONFIG_NET_QOS=y
|
||
CONFIG_NET_ESTIMATOR=y
|
||
CONFIG_NET_CLS=y
|
||
CONFIG_NET_CLS_TCINDEX=m
|
||
CONFIG_NET_CLS_ROUTE4=m
|
||
CONFIG_NET_CLS_ROUTE=y
|
||
CONFIG_NET_CLS_FW=m
|
||
CONFIG_NET_CLS_U32=m
|
||
CONFIG_NET_CLS_RSVP=m
|
||
CONFIG_NET_CLS_RSVP6=m
|
||
CONFIG_NET_CLS_POLICE=y
|
||
|
||
|
||
A kernel compiled with the above set of options will provide modular
|
||
support for almost everything discussed in this documentation. The user may
|
||
need to modprobe module before using a given feature. Again, the confused
|
||
user is recommended to the Kernel HOWTO, as this document cannot adequately
|
||
address questions about the use of the Linux kernel.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
5.2. iproute2 tools (tc)
|
||
|
||
iproute2 is a suite of command line utilities which manipulate kernel
|
||
structures for IP networking configuration on a machine. For technical
|
||
documentation on these tools, see the iproute2 documentation and for a more
|
||
expository discussion, the documentation at [http://linux-ip.net/]
|
||
linux-ip.net. Of the tools in the iproute2 package, the binary tc is the only
|
||
one used for traffic control. This HOWTO will ignore the other tools in the
|
||
suite.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Because it interacts with the kernel to direct the creation, deletion and
|
||
modification of traffic control structures, the tc binary needs to be
|
||
compiled with support for all of the qdiscs you wish to use. In particular,
|
||
the HTB qdisc is not supported yet in the upstream iproute2 package. See
|
||
Section 7.1 for more information.
|
||
|
||
The tc tool performs all of the configuration of the kernel structures
|
||
required to support traffic control. As a result of its many uses, the
|
||
command syntax can be described (at best) as arcane. The utility takes as its
|
||
first non-option argument one of three Linux traffic control components,
|
||
qdisc, class or filter.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Example 2. tc command usage
|
||
[root@leander]# tc
|
||
Usage: tc [ OPTIONS ] OBJECT { COMMAND | help }
|
||
where OBJECT := { qdisc | class | filter }
|
||
OPTIONS := { -s[tatistics] | -d[etails] | -r[aw] }
|
||
|
||
|
||
Each object accepts further and different options, and will be incompletely
|
||
described and documented below. The hints in the examples below are designed
|
||
to introduce the vagaries of tc command line syntax. For more examples,
|
||
consult the [http://lartc.org/howto/] LARTC HOWTO. For even better
|
||
understanding, consult the kernel and iproute2 code.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Example 3. tc qdisc
|
||
[root@leander]# tc qdisc add \ (1)
|
||
> dev eth0 \ (2)
|
||
> root \ (3)
|
||
> handle 1:0 \ (4)
|
||
> htb (5)
|
||
|
||
|
||
(1) Add a queuing discipline. The verb could also be del.
|
||
(2) Specify the device onto which we are attaching the new queuing
|
||
discipline.
|
||
(3) This means "egress" to tc. The word root must be used, however. Another
|
||
qdisc with limited functionality, the ingress qdisc can be attached to
|
||
the same device.
|
||
(4) The handle is a user-specified number of the form major:minor. The
|
||
minor number for any queueing discipline handle must always be zero (0).
|
||
An acceptable shorthand for a qdisc handle is the syntax "1:", where the
|
||
minor number is assumed to be zero (0) if not specified.
|
||
(5) This is the queuing discipline to attach, HTB in this example. Queuing
|
||
discipline specific parameters will follow this. In the example here, we
|
||
add no qdisc-specific parameters.
|
||
|
||
Above was the simplest use of the tc utility for adding a queuing
|
||
discipline to a device. Here's an example of the use of tc to add a class to
|
||
an existing parent class.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Example 4. tc class
|
||
[root@leander]# tc class add \ (1)
|
||
> dev eth0 \ (2)
|
||
> parent 1:1 \ (3)
|
||
> classid 1:6 \ (4)
|
||
> htb \ (5)
|
||
> rate 256kbit \ (6)
|
||
> ceil 512kbit (7)
|
||
|
||
|
||
(1) Add a class. The verb could also be del.
|
||
(2) Specify the device onto which we are attaching the new class.
|
||
(3) Specify the parent handle to which we are attaching the new class.
|
||
(4) This is a unique handle (major:minor) identifying this class. The minor
|
||
number must be any non-zero (0) number.
|
||
(5) Both of the classful qdiscs require that any children classes be
|
||
classes of the same type as the parent. Thus an HTB qdisc will contain
|
||
HTB classes.
|
||
(6) (7)
|
||
This is a class specific parameter. Consult Section 7.1 for more detail
|
||
on these parameters.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Example 5. tc filter
|
||
[root@leander]# tc filter add \ (1)
|
||
> dev eth0 \ (2)
|
||
> parent 1:0 \ (3)
|
||
> protocol ip \ (4)
|
||
> prio 5 \ (5)
|
||
> u32 \ (6)
|
||
> match ip port 22 0xffff \ (7)
|
||
> match ip tos 0x10 0xff \ (8)
|
||
> flowid 1:6 \ (9)
|
||
> police \ (10)
|
||
> rate 32000bps \ (11)
|
||
> burst 10240 \ (12)
|
||
> mpu 0 \ (13)
|
||
> action drop/continue (14)
|
||
|
||
|
||
(1) Add a filter. The verb could also be del.
|
||
(2) Specify the device onto which we are attaching the new filter.
|
||
(3) Specify the parent handle to which we are attaching the new filter.
|
||
(4) This parameter is required. It's use should be obvious, although I
|
||
don't know more.
|
||
(5) The prio parameter allows a given filter to be preferred above another.
|
||
The pref is a synonym.
|
||
(6) This is a classifier, and is a required phrase in every tc filter
|
||
command.
|
||
(7) (8)
|
||
These are parameters to the classifier. In this case, packets with a
|
||
type of service flag (indicating interactive usage) and matching port 22
|
||
will be selected by this statement.
|
||
(9) The flowid specifies the handle of the target class (or qdisc) to which
|
||
a matching filter should send its selected packets.
|
||
(10)
|
||
This is the policer, and is an optional phrase in every tc filter
|
||
command.
|
||
(11) The policer will perform one action above this rate, and another action
|
||
below (see action parameter).
|
||
(12) The burst is an exact analog to burst in HTB (burst is a buckets
|
||
concept).
|
||
(13) The minimum policed unit. To count all traffic, use an mpu of zero (0).
|
||
(14) The action indicates what should be done if the rate based on the
|
||
attributes of the policer. The first word specifies the action to take if
|
||
the policer has been exceeded. The second word specifies action to take
|
||
otherwise.
|
||
|
||
As evidenced above, the tc command line utility has an arcane and complex
|
||
syntax, even for simple operations such as these examples show. It should
|
||
come as no surprised to the reader that there exists an easier way to
|
||
configure Linux traffic control. See the next section, Section 5.3.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
5.3. tcng, Traffic Control Next Generation
|
||
|
||
FIXME; sing the praises of tcng. See also [http://tldp.org/HOWTO/
|
||
Traffic-Control-tcng-HTB-HOWTO/] Traffic Control using tcng and HTB HOWTO
|
||
and tcng documentation.
|
||
|
||
Traffic control next generation (hereafter, tcng) provides all of the power
|
||
of traffic control under Linux with twenty percent of the headache.
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
5.4. IMQ, Intermediate Queuing device
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
FIXME; must discuss IMQ. See also Patrick McHardy's website on [http://
|
||
trash.net/~kaber/imq/] IMQ.
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
6. Classless Queuing Disciplines (qdiscs)
|
||
|
||
Each of these queuing disciplines can be used as the primary qdisc on an
|
||
interface, or can be used inside a leaf class of a classful qdiscs. These are
|
||
the fundamental schedulers used under Linux. Note that the default scheduler
|
||
is the pfifo_fast.
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
6.1. FIFO, First-In First-Out (pfifo and bfifo)
|
||
|
||
Note This is not the default qdisc on Linux interfaces. Be certain to see
|
||
Section 6.2 for the full details on the default (pfifo_fast) qdisc.
|
||
|
||
The FIFO algorithm forms the basis for the default qdisc on all Linux
|
||
network interfaces (pfifo_fast). It performs no shaping or rearranging of
|
||
packets. It simply transmits packets as soon as it can after receiving and
|
||
queuing them. This is also the qdisc used inside all newly created classes
|
||
until another qdisc or a class replaces the FIFO.
|
||
|
||
[fifo-qdisc]
|
||
|
||
A real FIFO qdisc must, however, have a size limit (a buffer size) to
|
||
prevent it from overflowing in case it is unable to dequeue packets as
|
||
quickly as it receives them. Linux implements two basic FIFO qdiscs, one
|
||
based on bytes, and one on packets. Regardless of the type of FIFO used, the
|
||
size of the queue is defined by the parameter limit. For a pfifo the unit is
|
||
understood to be packets and for a bfifo the unit is understood to be bytes.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Example 6. Specifying a limit for a packet or byte FIFO
|
||
[root@leander]# cat bfifo.tcc
|
||
/*
|
||
* make a FIFO on eth0 with 10kbyte queue size
|
||
*
|
||
*/
|
||
|
||
dev eth0 {
|
||
egress {
|
||
fifo (limit 10kB );
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
[root@leander]# tcc < bfifo.tcc
|
||
# ================================ Device eth0 ================================
|
||
|
||
tc qdisc add dev eth0 handle 1:0 root dsmark indices 1 default_index 0
|
||
tc qdisc add dev eth0 handle 2:0 parent 1:0 bfifo limit 10240
|
||
[root@leander]# cat pfifo.tcc
|
||
/*
|
||
* make a FIFO on eth0 with 30 packet queue size
|
||
*
|
||
*/
|
||
|
||
dev eth0 {
|
||
egress {
|
||
fifo (limit 30p );
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
[root@leander]# tcc < pfifo.tcc
|
||
# ================================ Device eth0 ================================
|
||
|
||
tc qdisc add dev eth0 handle 1:0 root dsmark indices 1 default_index 0
|
||
tc qdisc add dev eth0 handle 2:0 parent 1:0 pfifo limit 30
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
6.2. pfifo_fast, the default Linux qdisc
|
||
|
||
The pfifo_fast qdisc is the default qdisc for all interfaces under Linux.
|
||
Based on a conventional FIFO qdisc, this qdisc also provides some
|
||
prioritization. It provides three different bands (individual FIFOs) for
|
||
separating traffic. The highest priority traffic (interactive flows) are
|
||
placed into band 0 and are always serviced first. Similarly, band 1 is always
|
||
emptied of pending packets before band 2 is dequeued.
|
||
|
||
[pfifo_fast-qdisc]
|
||
|
||
There is nothing configurable to the end user about the pfifo_fast qdisc.
|
||
For exact details on the priomap and use of the ToS bits, see the pfifo-fast
|
||
section of the LARTC HOWTO.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
6.3. SFQ, Stochastic Fair Queuing
|
||
|
||
The SFQ qdisc attempts to fairly distribute opportunity to transmit data to
|
||
the network among an arbitrary number of flows. It accomplishes this by using
|
||
a hash function to separate the traffic into separate (internally maintained)
|
||
FIFOs which are dequeued in a round-robin fashion. Because there is the
|
||
possibility for unfairness to manifest in the choice of hash function, this
|
||
function is altered periodically. Perturbation (the parameter perturb) sets
|
||
this periodicity.
|
||
|
||
[sfq-qdisc]
|
||
|
||
|
||
Example 7. Creating an SFQ
|
||
[root@leander]# cat sfq.tcc
|
||
/*
|
||
* make an SFQ on eth0 with a 10 second perturbation
|
||
*
|
||
*/
|
||
|
||
dev eth0 {
|
||
egress {
|
||
sfq( perturb 10s );
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
[root@leander]# tcc < sfq.tcc
|
||
# ================================ Device eth0 ================================
|
||
|
||
tc qdisc add dev eth0 handle 1:0 root dsmark indices 1 default_index 0
|
||
tc qdisc add dev eth0 handle 2:0 parent 1:0 sfq perturb 10
|
||
|
||
|
||
Unfortunately, some clever software (e.g. Kazaa and eMule among others)
|
||
obliterate the benefit of this attempt at fair queuing by opening as many TCP
|
||
sessions (flows) as can be sustained. In many networks, with well-behaved
|
||
users, SFQ can adequately distribute the network resources to the contending
|
||
flows, but other measures may be called for when obnoxious applications have
|
||
invaded the network.
|
||
|
||
See also Section 6.4 for an SFQ qdisc with more exposed parameters for the
|
||
user to manipulate.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
6.4. ESFQ, Extended Stochastic Fair Queuing
|
||
|
||
Conceptually, this qdisc is no different than SFQ although it allows the
|
||
user to control more parameters than its simpler cousin. This qdisc was
|
||
conceived to overcome the shortcoming of SFQ identified above. By allowing
|
||
the user to control which hashing algorithm is used for distributing access
|
||
to network bandwidth, it is possible for the user to reach a fairer real
|
||
distribution of bandwidth.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Example 8. ESFQ usage
|
||
Usage: ... esfq [ perturb SECS ] [ quantum BYTES ] [ depth FLOWS ]
|
||
[ divisor HASHBITS ] [ limit PKTS ] [ hash HASHTYPE]
|
||
|
||
Where:
|
||
HASHTYPE := { classic | src | dst }
|
||
|
||
|
||
FIXME; need practical experience and/or attestation here.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
6.5. GRED, Generic Random Early Drop
|
||
|
||
FIXME; I have never used this. Need practical experience or attestation.
|
||
|
||
Theory declares that a RED algorithm is useful on a backbone or core
|
||
network, but not as useful near the end-user. See the section on flows to see
|
||
a general discussion of the thirstiness of TCP.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
6.6. TBF, Token Bucket Filter
|
||
|
||
This qdisc is built on tokens and buckets. It simply shapes traffic
|
||
transmitted on an interface. To limit the speed at which packets will be
|
||
dequeued from a particular interface, the TBF qdisc is the perfect solution.
|
||
It simply slows down transmitted traffic to the specified rate.
|
||
|
||
Packets are only transmitted if there are sufficient tokens available.
|
||
Otherwise, packets are deferred. Delaying packets in this fashion will
|
||
introduce an artificial latency into the packet's round trip time.
|
||
|
||
[tbf-qdisc]
|
||
|
||
|
||
Example 9. Creating a 256kbit/s TBF
|
||
[root@leander]# cat tbf.tcc
|
||
/*
|
||
* make a 256kbit/s TBF on eth0
|
||
*
|
||
*/
|
||
|
||
dev eth0 {
|
||
egress {
|
||
tbf( rate 256 kbps, burst 20 kB, limit 20 kB, mtu 1514 B );
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
[root@leander]# tcc < tbf.tcc
|
||
# ================================ Device eth0 ================================
|
||
|
||
tc qdisc add dev eth0 handle 1:0 root dsmark indices 1 default_index 0
|
||
tc qdisc add dev eth0 handle 2:0 parent 1:0 tbf burst 20480 limit 20480 mtu 1514 rate 32000bps
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
7. Classful Queuing Disciplines (qdiscs)
|
||
|
||
The flexibility and control of Linux traffic control can be unleashed
|
||
through the agency of the classful qdiscs. Remember that the classful queuing
|
||
disciplines can have filters attached to them, allowing packets to be
|
||
directed to particular classes and subqueues.
|
||
|
||
There are several common terms to describe classes directly attached to the
|
||
root qdisc and terminal classes. Classess attached to the root qdisc are
|
||
known as root classes, and more generically inner classes. Any terminal class
|
||
in a particular queuing discipline is known as a leaf class by analogy to the
|
||
tree structure of the classes. Besides the use of figurative language
|
||
depicting the structure as a tree, the language of family relationships is
|
||
also quite common.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
7.1. HTB, Hierarchical Token Bucket
|
||
|
||
HTB uses the concepts of tokens and buckets along with the class-based
|
||
system and filters to allow for complex and granular control over traffic.
|
||
With a complex borrowing model, HTB can perform a variety of sophisticated
|
||
traffic control techniques. One of the easiest ways to use HTB immediately is
|
||
that of shaping.
|
||
|
||
By understanding tokens and buckets or by grasping the function of TBF, HTB
|
||
should be merely a logical step. This queuing discipline allows the user to
|
||
define the characteristics of the tokens and bucket used and allows the user
|
||
to nest these buckets in an arbitrary fashion. When coupled with a
|
||
classifying scheme, traffic can be controlled in a very granular fashion.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Below is example output of the syntax for HTB on the command line with the
|
||
tc tool. Although the syntax for tcng is a language of its own, the rules for
|
||
HTB are the same.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Example 10. tc usage for HTB
|
||
Usage: ... qdisc add ... htb [default N] [r2q N]
|
||
default minor id of class to which unclassified packets are sent {0}
|
||
r2q DRR quantums are computed as rate in Bps/r2q {10}
|
||
debug string of 16 numbers each 0-3 {0}
|
||
|
||
... class add ... htb rate R1 burst B1 [prio P] [slot S] [pslot PS]
|
||
[ceil R2] [cburst B2] [mtu MTU] [quantum Q]
|
||
rate rate allocated to this class (class can still borrow)
|
||
burst max bytes burst which can be accumulated during idle period {computed}
|
||
ceil definite upper class rate (no borrows) {rate}
|
||
cburst burst but for ceil {computed}
|
||
mtu max packet size we create rate map for {1600}
|
||
prio priority of leaf; lower are served first {0}
|
||
quantum how much bytes to serve from leaf at once {use r2q}
|
||
|
||
TC HTB version 3.3
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
7.1.1. Software requirements
|
||
|
||
Unlike almost all of the other software discussed, HTB is a newer queuing
|
||
discipline and your distribution may not have all of the tools and capability
|
||
you need to use HTB. The kernel must support HTB; kernel version 2.4.20 and
|
||
later support it in the stock distribution, although earlier kernel versions
|
||
require patching. To enable userland support for HTB, see [http://
|
||
luxik.cdi.cz/~devik/qos/htb/] HTB for an iproute2 patch to tc.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
7.1.2. Shaping
|
||
|
||
One of the most common applications of HTB involves shaping transmitted
|
||
traffic to a specific rate.
|
||
|
||
All shaping occurs in leaf classes. No shaping occurs in inner or root
|
||
classes as they only exist to suggest how the borrowing model should
|
||
distribute available tokens.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
7.1.3. Borrowing
|
||
|
||
A fundamental part of the HTB qdisc is the borrowing mechanism. Children
|
||
classes borrow tokens from their parents once they have exceeded rate. A
|
||
child class will continue to attempt to borrow until it reaches ceil, at
|
||
which point it will begin to queue packets for transmission until more tokens
|
||
/ctokens are available. As there are only two primary types of classes which
|
||
can be created with HTB the following table and diagram identify the various
|
||
possible states and the behaviour of the borrowing mechanisms.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Table 2. HTB class states and potential actions taken
|
||
+------+-----+--------------+-----------------------------------------------+
|
||
|type |class|HTB internal |action taken |
|
||
|of |state|state | |
|
||
|class | | | |
|
||
+------+-----+--------------+-----------------------------------------------+
|
||
|leaf |< |HTB_CAN_SEND |Leaf class will dequeue queued bytes up to |
|
||
| |rate | |available tokens (no more than burst packets) |
|
||
+------+-----+--------------+-----------------------------------------------+
|
||
|leaf |> |HTB_MAY_BORROW|Leaf class will attempt to borrow tokens/ |
|
||
| |rate,| |ctokens from parent class. If tokens are |
|
||
| |< | |available, they will be lent in quantum |
|
||
| |ceil | |increments and the leaf class will dequeue up |
|
||
| | | |to cburst bytes |
|
||
+------+-----+--------------+-----------------------------------------------+
|
||
|leaf |> |HTB_CANT_SEND |No packets will be dequeued. This will cause |
|
||
| |ceil | |packet delay and will increase latency to meet |
|
||
| | | |the desired rate. |
|
||
+------+-----+--------------+-----------------------------------------------+
|
||
|inner,|< |HTB_CAN_SEND |Inner class will lend tokens to children. |
|
||
|root |rate | | |
|
||
+------+-----+--------------+-----------------------------------------------+
|
||
|inner,|> |HTB_MAY_BORROW|Inner class will attempt to borrow tokens/ |
|
||
|root |rate,| |ctokens from parent class, lending them to |
|
||
| |< | |competing children in quantum increments per |
|
||
| |ceil | |request. |
|
||
+------+-----+--------------+-----------------------------------------------+
|
||
|inner,|> |HTB_CANT_SEND |Inner class will not attempt to borrow from its|
|
||
|root |ceil | |parent and will not lend tokens/ctokens to |
|
||
| | | |children classes. |
|
||
+------+-----+--------------+-----------------------------------------------+
|
||
|
||
This diagram identifies the flow of borrowed tokens and the manner in which
|
||
tokens are charged to parent classes. In order for the borrowing model to
|
||
work, each class must have an accurate count of the number of tokens used by
|
||
itself and all of its children. For this reason, any token used in a child or
|
||
leaf class is charged to each parent class until the root class is reached.
|
||
|
||
Any child class which wishes to borrow a token will request a token from
|
||
its parent class, which if it is also over its rate will request to borrow
|
||
from its parent class until either a token is located or the root class is
|
||
reached. So the borrowing of tokens flows toward the leaf classes and the
|
||
charging of the usage of tokens flows toward the root class.
|
||
|
||
[htb-borrow]
|
||
|
||
Note in this diagram that there are several HTB root classes. Each of these
|
||
root classes can simulate a virtual circuit.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
7.1.4. HTB class parameters
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
default
|
||
An optional parameter with every HTB qdisc object, the default default
|
||
is 0, which cause any unclassified traffic to be dequeued at hardware
|
||
speed, completely bypassing any of the classes attached to the root
|
||
qdisc.
|
||
|
||
rate
|
||
Used to set the minimum desired speed to which to limit transmitted
|
||
traffic. This can be considered the equivalent of a committed information
|
||
rate (CIR), or the guaranteed bandwidth for a given leaf class.
|
||
|
||
ceil
|
||
Used to set the maximum desired speed to which to limit the transmitted
|
||
traffic. The borrowing model should illustrate how this parameter is
|
||
used. This can be considered the equivalent of "burstable bandwidth".
|
||
|
||
burst
|
||
This is the size of the rate bucket (see Tokens and buckets). HTB will
|
||
dequeue burst bytes before awaiting the arrival of more tokens.
|
||
|
||
cburst
|
||
This is the size of the ceil bucket (see Tokens and buckets). HTB will
|
||
dequeue cburst bytes before awaiting the arrival of more ctokens.
|
||
|
||
quantum
|
||
This is a key parameter used by HTB to control borrowing. Normally, the
|
||
correct quantum is calculated by HTB, not specified by the user. Tweaking
|
||
this parameter can have tremendous effects on borrowing and shaping under
|
||
contention, because it is used both to split traffic between children
|
||
classes over rate (but below ceil) and to transmit packets from these
|
||
same classes.
|
||
|
||
r2q
|
||
Also, usually calculated for the user, r2q is a hint to HTB to help
|
||
determine the optimal quantum for a particular class.
|
||
|
||
mtu
|
||
|
||
|
||
prio
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
7.1.5. Rules
|
||
|
||
Below are some general guidelines to using HTB culled from [http://
|
||
docum.org/] http://docum.org/ and the LARTC mailing list. These rules are
|
||
simply a recommendation for beginners to maximize the benefit of HTB until
|
||
gaining a better understanding of the practical application of HTB.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> Shaping with HTB occurs only in leaf classes. See also Section 7.1.2.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> Because HTB does not shape in any class except the leaf class, the sum
|
||
of the rates of leaf classes should not exceed the ceil of a parent
|
||
class. Ideally, the sum of the rates of the children classes would match
|
||
the rate of the parent class, allowing the parent class to distribute
|
||
leftover bandwidth (ceil - rate) among the children classes.
|
||
|
||
This key concept in employing HTB bears repeating. Only leaf classes
|
||
actually shape packets; packets are only delayed in these leaf classes.
|
||
The inner classes (all the way up to the root class) exist to define how
|
||
borrowing/lending occurs (see also Section 7.1.3).
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> The quantum is only only used when a class is over rate but below ceil.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> The quantum should be set at MTU or higher. HTB will dequeue a single
|
||
packet at least per service opportunity even if quantum is too small. In
|
||
such a case, it will not be able to calculate accurately the real
|
||
bandwidth consumed [9].
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> Parent classes lend tokens to children in increments of quantum, so for
|
||
maximum granularity and most instantaneously evenly distributed
|
||
bandwidth, quantum should be as low as possible while still no less than
|
||
MTU.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> A distinction between tokens and ctokens is only meaningful in a leaf
|
||
class, because non-leaf classes only lend tokens to child classes.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> HTB borrowing could more accurately be described as "using".
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
7.2. PRIO, priority scheduler
|
||
|
||
The PRIO classful qdisc works on a very simple precept. When it is ready to
|
||
dequeue a packet, the first class is checked for a packet. If there's a
|
||
packet, it gets dequeued. If there's no packet, then the next class is
|
||
checked, until the queuing mechanism has no more classes to check.
|
||
|
||
This section will be completed at a later date.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
7.3. CBQ, Class Based Queuing
|
||
|
||
CBQ is the classic implementation (also called venerable) of a traffic
|
||
control system. This section will be completed at a later date.
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
8. Rules, Guidelines and Approaches
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
8.1. General Rules of Linux Traffic Control
|
||
|
||
There are a few general rules which ease the study of Linux traffic
|
||
control. Traffic control structures under Linux are the same whether the
|
||
initial configuration has been done with tcng or with tc.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> Any router performing a shaping function should be the bottleneck on
|
||
the link, and should be shaping slightly below the maximum available link
|
||
bandwidth. This prevents queues from forming in other routers, affording
|
||
maximum control of packet latency/deferral to the shaping device.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> A device can only shape traffic it transmits [10]. Because the traffic
|
||
has already been received on an input interface, the traffic cannot be
|
||
shaped. A traditional solution to this problem is an ingress policer.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> Every interface must have a qdisc. The default qdisc (the pfifo_fast
|
||
qdisc) is used when another qdisc is not explicitly attached to the
|
||
interface.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> One of the classful qdiscs added to an interface with no children
|
||
classes typically only consumes CPU for no benefit.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> Any newly created class contains a FIFO. This qdisc can be replaced
|
||
explicitly with any other qdisc. The FIFO qdisc will be removed
|
||
implicitly if a child class is attached to this class.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> Classes directly attached to the root qdisc can be used to simulate
|
||
virtual circuits.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> A filter can be attached to classes or one of the classful qdiscs.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
8.2. Handling a link with a known bandwidth
|
||
|
||
HTB is an ideal qdisc to use on a link with a known bandwidth, because the
|
||
innermost (root-most) class can be set to the maximum bandwidth available on
|
||
a given link. Flows can be further subdivided into children classes, allowing
|
||
either guaranteed bandwidth to particular classes of traffic or allowing
|
||
preference to specific kinds of traffic.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
8.3. Handling a link with a variable (or unknown) bandwidth
|
||
|
||
In theory, the PRIO scheduler is an ideal match for links with variable
|
||
bandwidth, because it is a work-conserving qdisc (which means that it
|
||
provides no shaping). In the case of a link with an unknown or fluctuating
|
||
bandwidth, the PRIO scheduler simply prefers to dequeue any available packet
|
||
in the highest priority band first, then falling to the lower priority
|
||
queues.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
8.4. Sharing/splitting bandwidth based on flows
|
||
|
||
Of the many types of contention for network bandwidth, this is one of the
|
||
easier types of contention to address in general. By using the SFQ qdisc,
|
||
traffic in a particular queue can be separated into flows, each of which will
|
||
be serviced fairly (inside that queue). Well-behaved applications (and users)
|
||
will find that using SFQ and ESFQ are sufficient for most sharing needs.
|
||
|
||
The Achilles heel of these fair queuing algorithms is a misbehaving user or
|
||
application which opens many connections simultaneously (e.g., eMule,
|
||
eDonkey, Kazaa). By creating a large number of individual flows, the
|
||
application can dominate slots in the fair queuing algorithm. Restated, the
|
||
fair queuing algorithm has no idea that a single application is generating
|
||
the majority of the flows, and cannot penalize the user. Other methods are
|
||
called for.
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
8.5. Sharing/splitting bandwidth based on IP
|
||
|
||
For many administrators this is the ideal method of dividing bandwidth
|
||
amongst their users. Unfortunately, there is no easy solution, and it becomes
|
||
increasingly complex with the number of machine sharing a network link.
|
||
|
||
To divide bandwidth equitably between N IP addresses, there must be N
|
||
classes.
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
9. Scripts for use with QoS/Traffic Control
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
9.1. wondershaper
|
||
|
||
More to come, see [http://lartc.org/wondershaper/] wondershaper.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
9.2. ADSL Bandwidth HOWTO script (myshaper)
|
||
|
||
More to come, see [http://www.tldp.org/HOWTO/
|
||
ADSL-Bandwidth-Management-HOWTO/implementation.html] myshaper.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
9.3. htb.init
|
||
|
||
More to come, see htb.init.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
9.4. tcng.init
|
||
|
||
More to come, see tcng.init.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
9.5. cbq.init
|
||
|
||
More to come, see cbq.init.
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
10. Diagram
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
10.1. General diagram
|
||
|
||
Below is a general diagram of the relationships of the components of a
|
||
classful queuing discipline (HTB pictured). A larger version of the diagram
|
||
is [http://linux-ip.net/traffic-control/htb-class.png] available.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Example 11. An example HTB tcng configuration
|
||
/*
|
||
*
|
||
* possible mock up of diagram shown at
|
||
* http://linux-ip.net/traffic-control/htb-class.png
|
||
*
|
||
*/
|
||
|
||
$m_web = trTCM (
|
||
cir 512 kbps, /* commited information rate */
|
||
cbs 10 kB, /* burst for CIR */
|
||
pir 1024 kbps, /* peak information rate */
|
||
pbs 10 kB /* burst for PIR */
|
||
) ;
|
||
|
||
dev eth0 {
|
||
egress {
|
||
|
||
class ( <$web> ) if tcp_dport == PORT_HTTP && __trTCM_green( $m_web );
|
||
class ( <$bulk> ) if tcp_dport == PORT_HTTP && __trTCM_yellow( $m_web );
|
||
drop if __trTCM_red( $m_web );
|
||
class ( <$bulk> ) if tcp_dport == PORT_SSH ;
|
||
|
||
htb () { /* root qdisc */
|
||
|
||
class ( rate 1544kbps, ceil 1544kbps ) { /* root class */
|
||
|
||
$web = class ( rate 512kbps, ceil 512kbps ) { sfq ; } ;
|
||
$bulk = class ( rate 512kbps, ceil 1544kbps ) { sfq ; } ;
|
||
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
[htb-class]
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
11. Annotated Traffic Control Links
|
||
|
||
This section identifies a number of links to documentation about traffic
|
||
control and Linux traffic control software. Each link will be listed with a
|
||
brief description of the content at that site.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> HTB site, HTB user guide and HTB theory (Martin "devik" Devera)
|
||
|
||
Hierarchical Token Bucket, HTB, is a classful queuing discipline.
|
||
Widely used and supported it is also fairly well documented in the user
|
||
guide and at [http://www.docum.org/] Stef Coene's site (see below).
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> General Quality of Service docs (Leonardo Balliache)
|
||
|
||
|
||
There is a good deal of understandable and introductory documentation on
|
||
his site, and in particular has some excellent overview material. See in
|
||
particular, the detailed [http://opalsoft.net/qos/DS.htm] Linux QoS
|
||
document among others.
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> tcng (Traffic Control Next Generation) and tcng manual (Werner
|
||
Almesberger)
|
||
|
||
The tcng software includes a language and a set of tools for creating
|
||
and testing traffic control structures. In addition to generating tc
|
||
commands as output, it is also capable of providing output for non-Linux
|
||
applications. A key piece of the tcng suite which is ignored in this
|
||
documentation is the tcsim traffic control simulator.
|
||
|
||
The user manual provided with the tcng software has been converted to
|
||
HTML with latex2html. The distribution comes with the TeX documentation.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> iproute2 and iproute2 manual (Alexey Kuznetsov)
|
||
|
||
This is a the source code for the iproute2 suite, which includes the
|
||
essential tc binary. Note, that as of
|
||
iproute2-2.4.7-now-ss020116-try.tar.gz, the package did not support HTB,
|
||
so a patch available from the [http://luxik.cdi.cz/~devik/qos/htb/] HTB
|
||
site will be required.
|
||
|
||
The manual documents the entire suite of tools, although the tc utility
|
||
is not adequately documented here. The ambitious reader is recommended to
|
||
the LARTC HOWTO after consuming this introduction.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> Documentation, graphs, scripts and guidelines to traffic control under
|
||
Linux (Stef Coene)
|
||
|
||
Stef Coene has been gathering statistics and test results, scripts and
|
||
tips for the use of QoS under Linux. There are some particularly useful
|
||
graphs and guidelines available for implementing traffic control at
|
||
Stef's site.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> [http://lartc.org/howto/] LARTC HOWTO (bert hubert, et. al.)
|
||
|
||
The Linux Advanced Routing and Traffic Control HOWTO is one of the key
|
||
sources of data about the sophisticated techniques which are available
|
||
for use under Linux. The Traffic Control Introduction HOWTO should
|
||
provide the reader with enough background in the language and concepts of
|
||
traffic control. The LARTC HOWTO is the next place the reader should look
|
||
for general traffic control information.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> Guide to IP Networking with Linux (Martin A. Brown)
|
||
|
||
Not directly related to traffic control, this site includes articles
|
||
and general documentation on the behaviour of the Linux IP layer.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> Werner Almesberger's Papers
|
||
|
||
Werner Almesberger is one of the main developers and champions of
|
||
traffic control under Linux (he's also the author of tcng, above). One of
|
||
the key documents describing the entire traffic control architecture of
|
||
the Linux kernel is his Linux Traffic Control - Implementation Overview
|
||
which is available in [http://www.almesberger.net/cv/papers/tcio8.pdf]
|
||
PDF or [http://www.almesberger.net/cv/papers/tcio8.ps.gz] PS format.
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> Linux DiffServ project
|
||
|
||
Mercilessly snipped from the main page of the DiffServ site...
|
||
|
||
Differentiated Services (short: Diffserv) is an architecture for
|
||
providing different types or levels of service for network traffic.
|
||
One key characteristic of Diffserv is that flows are aggregated in
|
||
the network, so that core routers only need to distinguish a
|
||
comparably small number of aggregated flows, even if those flows
|
||
contain thousands or millions of individual flows.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Notes
|
||
|
||
[1] See Section 5 for more details on the use or installation of a
|
||
particular traffic control mechanism, kernel or command line utility.
|
||
[2] This queueing model has long been used in civilized countries to
|
||
distribute scant food or provisions equitably. William Faulkner is
|
||
reputed to have walked to the front of the line for to fetch his share
|
||
of ice, proving that not everybody likes the FIFO model, and providing
|
||
us a model for considering priority queuing.
|
||
[3] Similarly, the entire traffic control system appears as a queue or
|
||
scheduler to the higher layer which is enqueuing packets into this
|
||
layer.
|
||
[4] This smoothing effect is not always desirable, hence the HTB parameters
|
||
burst and cburst.
|
||
[5] A classful qdisc can only have children classes of its type. For
|
||
example, an HTB qdisc can only have HTB classes as children. A CBQ qdisc
|
||
cannot have HTB classes as children.
|
||
[6] In this case, you'll have a filter which uses a classifier to select the
|
||
packets you wish to drop. Then you'll use a policer with a with a drop
|
||
action like this police rate 1bps burst 1 action drop/drop.
|
||
[7] I do not know the range nor base of these numbers. I believe they are
|
||
u32 hexadecimal, but need to confirm this.
|
||
[8] The options listed in this example are taken from a 2.4.20 kernel source
|
||
tree. The exact options may differ slightly from kernel release to
|
||
kernel release depending on patches and new schedulers and classifiers.
|
||
[9] HTB will report bandwidth usage in this scenario incorrectly. It will
|
||
calculate the bandwidth used by quantum instead of the real dequeued
|
||
packet size. This can skew results quickly.
|
||
[10] In fact, the Intermediate Queuing Device (IMQ) simulates an output
|
||
device onto which traffic control structures can be attached. This
|
||
clever solution allows a networking device to shape ingress traffic in
|
||
the same fashion as egress traffic. Despite the apparent contradiction
|
||
of the rule, IMQ appears as a device to the kernel. Thus, there has been
|
||
no violation of the rule, but rather a sneaky reinterpretation of that
|
||
rule.
|
||
|
||
ProxyARP Subnetting HOWTO
|
||
|
||
Bob Edwards
|
||
|
||
Robert.Edwards@anu.edu.au
|
||
|
||
v2.0, 27 August 2000
|
||
|
||
This HOWTO discusses using Proxy Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
|
||
with subnetting in order to make a small network of machines visible
|
||
on another Internet Protocol (IP) subnet (I call it sub-subnetting).
|
||
This makes all the machines on the local network (network 0 from now
|
||
on) appear as if they are connected to the main network (network 1).
|
||
|
||
This is only relevent if all machines are connected by Ethernet or
|
||
ether devices (ie. it won't work for SLIP/PPP/CSLIP etc.)
|
||
_________________________________________________________________
|
||
|
||
Table of Contents
|
||
1. [1]Acknowledgements
|
||
2. [2]Why use Proxy ARP with subnetting?
|
||
3. [3]How Proxy ARP with subnetting works
|
||
4. [4]Setting up Proxy ARP with subnetting
|
||
5. [5]Other alternatives to Proxy ARP with subnetting
|
||
6. [6]Other Applications of Proxy ARP with subnetting
|
||
7. [7]Copying conditions
|
||
|
||
1. Acknowledgements
|
||
|
||
This document, and my Proxy ARP implementation could not have been
|
||
made possible without the help of:
|
||
|
||
* Andrew Tridgell, who implemented the subnetting options for arp in
|
||
Linux, and who personally assisted me in getting it working
|
||
* the Proxy-ARP mini-HOWTO, by Al Longyear
|
||
* the Multiple-Ethernet mini-HOWTO, by Don Becker
|
||
* the arp(8) source code and man page by Fred N. van Kempen and
|
||
Bernd Eckenfels
|
||
_________________________________________________________________
|
||
|
||
2. Why use Proxy ARP with subnetting?
|
||
|
||
The applications for using Proxy ARP with subnetting are fairly
|
||
specific.
|
||
|
||
In my case, I had a wireless Ethernet card that plugs into an 8-bit
|
||
ISA slot. I wanted to use this card to provide connectivity for a
|
||
number of machines at once. Being an ISA card, I could use it on a
|
||
Linux machine, after I had written an appropriate device driver for it
|
||
- this is the subject of another document. From here, it was only
|
||
necessary to add a second Ethernet interface to the Linux machine and
|
||
then use some mechanism to join the two networks together.
|
||
|
||
For the purposes of discussion, let network 0 be the local Ethernet
|
||
connected to the Linux box via an NE-2000 clone Ethernet interface on
|
||
eth0. Network 1 is the main network connected via the wireless
|
||
Ethernet card on eth1. Machine A is the Linux box with both
|
||
interfaces. Machine B is any TCP/IP machine on network 0 and machine C
|
||
is likewise on network 1.
|
||
|
||
Normally, to provide the connectivity, I would have done one of the
|
||
following:
|
||
|
||
* Used the IP-Bridge software (see the Bridge mini-HOWTO) to bridge
|
||
the traffic between the two network interfaces. Unfortunately, the
|
||
wireless Ethernet interface cannot be put into "Promiscuous" mode
|
||
(ie. it can't see all packets on network 1). This is mainly due to
|
||
the lower bandwidth of the wireless Ethernet (2MBit/sec) meaning
|
||
that we don't want to carry any traffic not specifically destined
|
||
to another wireless Ethernet machine - in our case machine A - or
|
||
broadcasts. Also, bridging is rather CPU intensive!
|
||
* Alternatively, use subnets and an IP-router to pass packets
|
||
between the two networks (see the IP-Subnetworking mini-HOWTO).
|
||
This is a protocol specific solution, where the Linux kernel can
|
||
handle the Internet Protocol (IP) packets, but other protocols
|
||
(such as AppleTalk) need extra software to route. This also
|
||
requires the allocation of a new IP subnet (network) number, which
|
||
is not always an option.
|
||
|
||
In my case, getting a new subnet (network) number was not an option,
|
||
so I wanted a solution that allowed all the machines on network 0 to
|
||
appear as if they were on network 1. This is where Proxy ARP comes in.
|
||
Other solutions are used to connect other (non-IP) protocols, such as
|
||
netatalk to provide AppleTalk routing.
|
||
_________________________________________________________________
|
||
|
||
3. How Proxy ARP with subnetting works
|
||
|
||
The Proxy ARP is actually only used to get packets from network 1 to
|
||
network 0. To get packets back the other way, the normal IP routing
|
||
functionality is employed.
|
||
|
||
In my case, network 1 has an 8-bit subnet mask (255.255.255.0). I have
|
||
chosen the subnet mask for network 0 to be 4-bit (255.255.255.240),
|
||
allowing 14 IP nodes on network 0 (2 ^ 4 = 16, less two for the all
|
||
zeros and all ones cases). Note that any size of subnet mask up to,
|
||
but not including, the size of the mask of the other network is
|
||
allowable here (eg. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7 bits in this case - for one
|
||
bit, just use normal Proxy ARP!)
|
||
|
||
All the IP numbers for network 0 (16 in total) appear in network 1 as
|
||
a subset. Note that it is very important, in this case, not to allow
|
||
any machine connected directly to network 1 to have an IP number in
|
||
this range! In my case, I have "reserved" the IP numbers of network 1
|
||
ending in 64 .. 79 for network 0. In this case, the IP numbers ending
|
||
in 64 and 79 can't actually be used by nodes - 79 is the broadcast
|
||
address for network 0.
|
||
|
||
Machine A is allocated two IP numbers, one within the network 0 range
|
||
for it's real Ethernet interface (eth0) and the other within the
|
||
network 1 range, but outside of the network 0 range, for the wireless
|
||
Ethernet interface (eth1).
|
||
|
||
Say machine C (on network 1) wants to send a packet to machine B (on
|
||
network 0). Because the IP number of machine B makes it look to
|
||
machine C as though it is on the same physical network, machine C will
|
||
use the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to send a broadcast message
|
||
on network 1 requesting the machine with the IP number of machine B to
|
||
respond with it's hardware (Ethernet or MAC layer) address. Machine B
|
||
won't see this request, as it isn't actually on network 1, but machine
|
||
A, on both networks, will see it.
|
||
|
||
The first bit of magic now happens as the Linux kernel arp code on
|
||
machine A, with a properly configured Proxy ARP with subnetting entry,
|
||
determines that the ARP request has come in on the network 1 interface
|
||
(eth1) and that the IP number being ARP'd for is in the subnet range
|
||
for network 0. Machine A then sends it's own hardware (Ethernet)
|
||
address back to machine C as an ARP response packet.
|
||
|
||
Machine C then updates it's ARP cache with an entry for machine B, but
|
||
with the hardware (Ethernet) address of machine A (in this case, the
|
||
wireless Ethernet interface). Machine C can now send the packet for
|
||
machine B to this hardware (Ethernet) address, and machine A receives
|
||
it.
|
||
|
||
Machine A notices that the destination IP number in the packet is that
|
||
of machine B, not itself. Machine A's Linux kernel IP routing code
|
||
attempts to forward the packet to machine B by looking at it's routing
|
||
tables to determine which interface contains the network number for
|
||
machine B. However, the IP number for machine B is valid for both the
|
||
network 0 interface (eth0), and for the network 1 interface (eth1).
|
||
|
||
At this point, something else clever happens. Because the subnet mask
|
||
for the network 0 interface has more 1 bits (it is more specific) than
|
||
the subnet mask for the network 1 interface, the Linux kernel routing
|
||
code will match the IP number for machine B to the network 0
|
||
interface, and not keep looking for the potential match with the
|
||
network 1 interface (the one the packet came in on).
|
||
|
||
Now machine A needs to find out the "real" hardware (Ethernet) address
|
||
for machine B (assuming that it doesn't already have it in the ARP
|
||
cache). Machine A uses an ARP request, but this time the Linux kernel
|
||
arp code notes that the request isn't coming from the network 1
|
||
interface (eth1), and so doesn't respond with the Proxy address of
|
||
eth1. Instead, it sends the ARP request on the network 0 interface
|
||
(eth0), where machine B will see it and respond with it's own (real)
|
||
hardware (Ethernet) address. Now machine A can send the packet (from
|
||
machine C) onto machine B.
|
||
|
||
Machine B gets the packet from machine C (via machine A) and then
|
||
wants to send back a response. This time, machine B notices that
|
||
machine C in on a different subnet (machine B's subnet mask of
|
||
255.255.255.240 excludes all machines not in the network 0 IP address
|
||
range). Machine B is setup with a "default" route to machine A's
|
||
network 0 IP number and sends the packet to machine A. This time,
|
||
machine A's Linux kernel routing code determines the destination IP
|
||
number (of machine C) as being on network 1 and sends the packet onto
|
||
machine C via Ethernet interface eth1.
|
||
|
||
Similar (less complicated) things occur for packets originating from
|
||
and destined to machine A from other machines on either of the two
|
||
networks.
|
||
|
||
Similarly, it should be obvious that if another machine (D) on network
|
||
0 ARP's for machine B, machine A will receive the ARP request on it's
|
||
network 0 interface (eth0) and won't respond to the request as it is
|
||
set up to only Proxy on it's network 1 interface (eth1).
|
||
|
||
Note also that all of machines B and C (and D) are not required to do
|
||
anything unusual, IP-wise. In my case, there is a mixture of Suns,
|
||
Macs and PC/Windoze 95 machines on network 0 all connecting through
|
||
Linux machine A to the rest of the world.
|
||
|
||
Finally, note that once the hardware (Ethernet) addresses are
|
||
discovered by each of machines A, B, C (and D), they are placed in the
|
||
ARP cache and subsequent packet transfers occur without the ARP
|
||
overhead. The ARP caches normally expire entries after 5 minutes of
|
||
non-activity.
|
||
_________________________________________________________________
|
||
|
||
4. Setting up Proxy ARP with subnetting
|
||
|
||
I set up Proxy ARP with subnetting on a Linux kernel version 2.0.30
|
||
machine, but I am told that the code works right back to some kernel
|
||
version in the 1.2.x era.
|
||
|
||
The first thing to note is that the ARP code is in two parts: the part
|
||
inside the kernel that sends and receives ARP requests and responses
|
||
and updates the ARP cache etc.; and other part is the arp(8) command
|
||
that allows the super user to modify the ARP cache manually and anyone
|
||
to examine it.
|
||
|
||
The first problem I had was that the arp(8) command that came with my
|
||
Slackware 3.1 distribution was ancient (1994 era!!!) and didn't
|
||
communicate with the kernel arp code correctly at all (mainly
|
||
evidenced by the strange output that it gave for "arp -a").
|
||
|
||
The arp(8) command in "net-tools-1.33a" available from a variety of
|
||
places, including (from the README file that came with it)
|
||
[8]ftp.linux.org.uk:/pub/linux/Networking/base/ works properly and
|
||
includes new man pages that explain stuff a lot better than the older
|
||
arp(8) man page.
|
||
|
||
Armed with a decent arp(8) command, all the changes I made were in the
|
||
/etc/rc.d/rc.inet1 script (for Slackware - probably different for
|
||
other flavours). First of all, we need to change the broadcast
|
||
address, network number and netmask of eth0:
|
||
|
||
NETMASK=255.255.255.240 # for a 4-bit host part
|
||
NETWORK=x.y.z.64 # our new network number (replace x.y.z with your net)
|
||
BROADCAST=x.y.z.79 # in my case
|
||
|
||
Then a line needs to be added to configure the second Ethernet port
|
||
(after any module loading that might be required to load the driver
|
||
code):
|
||
|
||
/sbin/ifconfig eth1 (name on net 1) broadcast (x.y.z.255) netmask 255.255.255.0
|
||
|
||
Then we add a route for the new interface:
|
||
|
||
/sbin/route add -net (x.y.z.0) netmask 255.255.255.0
|
||
|
||
And you will probably need to change the default gateway to the one
|
||
for network 1.
|
||
|
||
At this point, it is appropriate to add the Proxy ARP entry:
|
||
|
||
/sbin/arp -i eth1 -Ds ${NETWORK} eth1 netmask ${NETMASK} pub
|
||
|
||
This tells ARP to add a static entry (the s) to the cache for network
|
||
${NETWORK}. The -D tells ARP to use the same hardware address as
|
||
interface eth1 (the second eth1), thus saving us from having to look
|
||
up the hardware address for eth1 and hardcoding it in. The netmask
|
||
option tells ARP that we want to use subnetting (ie. Proxy for all (IP
|
||
number) & ${NETMASK} == ${NETWORK} & ${NETMASK}). The pub option tells
|
||
ARP to publish this ARP entry, ie. it is a Proxy entry, so respond on
|
||
behalf of these IP numbers. The -i eth1 option tells ARP to only
|
||
respond to requests that come in on interface eth1.
|
||
|
||
Hopefully, at this point, when the machine is rebooted, all the
|
||
machines on network 0 will appear to be on network 1. You can check
|
||
that the Proxy ARP with subnetting entry has been correctly installed
|
||
on machine A. On my machine (names changed to protect the innocent) it
|
||
is:
|
||
|
||
bash$ /sbin/arp -an
|
||
Address HWtype HWaddress Flags Mask Iface
|
||
x.y.z.1 ether 00:00:0C:13:6F:17 C * eth1
|
||
x.y.z.65 ether 00:40:05:49:77:01 C * eth0
|
||
x.y.z.67 ether 08:00:20:0B:79:47 C * eth0
|
||
x.y.z.5 ether 00:00:3B:80:18:E5 C * eth1
|
||
x.y.z.64 ether 00:40:96:20:CD:D2 CMP 255.255.255.240 eth1
|
||
|
||
Alternatively, you can examine the /proc/net/arp file with eg. cat(1).
|
||
|
||
The last line is the proxy entry for the subnet. The CMP flags
|
||
indicate that it is a static (Manually entered) entry and that it is
|
||
to be Published. The entry is only going to reply to ARP requests on
|
||
eth1 where the requested IP number, once masked, matches the network
|
||
number, also masked. Note that arp(8) has automatically determined the
|
||
hardware address of eth1 and inserted this for the address to use (the
|
||
-Ds option).
|
||
|
||
Likewise, it is probably prudent to check that the routing table has
|
||
been set up correctly. Here is mine (again, the names are changed to
|
||
protect the innocent):
|
||
|
||
#/bin/netstat -rn
|
||
Kernel routing table
|
||
Destination Gateway Genmask Flags Metric Ref Use Iface
|
||
x.y.z.64 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.240 U 0 0 71 eth0
|
||
x.y.z.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 U 0 0 389 eth1
|
||
127.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 U 0 0 7 lo
|
||
0.0.0.0 x.y.z.1 0.0.0.0 UG 1 0 573 eth1
|
||
|
||
Alternatively, you can examine the /proc/net/route file with eg.
|
||
cat(1).
|
||
|
||
Note that the first entry is a proper subset of the second, but the
|
||
routing table has ranked them in netmask order, so the eth0 entry will
|
||
be checked before the eth1 entry.
|
||
_________________________________________________________________
|
||
|
||
5. Other alternatives to Proxy ARP with subnetting
|
||
|
||
There are several other alternatives to using Proxy ARP with
|
||
subnetting in this situation, apart from the ones mentioned about
|
||
(bridging and straight routing):
|
||
|
||
* IP-Masquerading (see the IP-Masquerade mini-HOWTO), in which
|
||
network 0 is "hidden" behind machine A from the rest of the
|
||
Internet. As machines on network 0 attempt to connect outside
|
||
through machine A, it re-addresses the source address and port
|
||
number of the packets and makes them look like they are coming
|
||
from itself, rather than from the machine on the hidden network 0.
|
||
This is an elegant solution, although it prevents any machine on
|
||
network 1 from initiating a connection to any machine on network
|
||
0, as the machines on network 0 effectively don't exist outside of
|
||
network 0. This effectively increases security of the machines on
|
||
network 0, but is also means that servers on network 1 cannot
|
||
check the identity of clients on network 0 using IP numbers (eg.
|
||
NFS servers use IP hostnames for access to mountable file
|
||
systems).
|
||
* Another option is IP in IP tunneling, which isn't supported on all
|
||
platforms (such as Macs and Windoze machines) so I opted not to go
|
||
this way.
|
||
* Use Proxy ARP without subnetting. This is certainly possible, it
|
||
just means that a separate entry needs to be created for each
|
||
machine on network 0, instead of a single entry for all machines
|
||
(current and future) on network 0.
|
||
* Possibly IP Aliasing might also be useful here, but I haven't
|
||
looked into this at all.
|
||
_________________________________________________________________
|
||
|
||
6. Other Applications of Proxy ARP with subnetting
|
||
|
||
There is only one other application that I know about that uses Proxy
|
||
ARP with subnetting, also here at the Australian National University.
|
||
It is the one that Andrew Tridgell originally wrote the subnetting
|
||
extensions to Proxy ARP for. However, Andrew reliably informs me that
|
||
there are, in fact, several other sites around the world using it as
|
||
well (I don't have any details).
|
||
|
||
The other A.N.U. application involves a teaching lab set up to teach
|
||
students how to configure machines to use TCP/IP, including setting up
|
||
the gateway. The network used is a Class C network, and Andrew needed
|
||
to "subnet" it for security, traffic control and the educational
|
||
reason mentioned above. He did this using Proxy ARP, and then decided
|
||
that a single entry in the ARP cache for the whole subnet would be
|
||
faster and cleaner than one for each host on the subnet. Voila...Proxy
|
||
ARP with subnetting!
|
||
_________________________________________________________________
|
||
|
||
7. Copying conditions
|
||
|
||
Copyright 1997 by Bob Edwards <[9]Robert.Edwards@anu.edu.au>
|
||
|
||
Voice: (+61) 2 6249 4090
|
||
|
||
Unless otherwise stated, Linux HOWTO documents are copyrighted by
|
||
their respective authors. Linux HOWTO documents may be reproduced and
|
||
distributed in whole or in part, in any medium physical or electronic,
|
||
as long as this copyright notice is retained on all copies. Commercial
|
||
redistribution is allowed and encouraged; however, the author would
|
||
like to be notified of any such distributions. All translations,
|
||
derivative works, or aggregate works incorporating any Linux HOWTO
|
||
documents must be covered under this copyright notice. That is, you
|
||
may not produce a derivative work from a HOWTO and impose additional
|
||
restrictions on its distribution. Exceptions to these rules may be
|
||
granted under certain conditions; please contact the Linux HOWTO
|
||
coordinator at the address given below. In short, we wish to promote
|
||
dissemination of this information through as many channels as
|
||
possible. However, we do wish to retain copyright on the HOWTO
|
||
documents, and would like to be notified of any plans to redistribute
|
||
the HOWTOs. If you have questions, please contact the Linux HOWTO
|
||
coordinator, at <[10]linux-howto@metalab.unc.edu> via email.
|
||
|
||
References
|
||
|
||
1. Proxy-ARP-Subnet.html#INTRO
|
||
2. Proxy-ARP-Subnet.html#WHY
|
||
3. Proxy-ARP-Subnet.html#HOW
|
||
4. Proxy-ARP-Subnet.html#SETUP
|
||
5. Proxy-ARP-Subnet.html#ALTERNATIVES
|
||
6. Proxy-ARP-Subnet.html#APPLICATIONS
|
||
7. Proxy-ARP-Subnet.html#COPYING
|
||
8. ftp://ftp.linux.org.uk/pub/linux/Networking/base/
|
||
9. mailto:Robert.Edwards@anu.edu.au
|
||
10. mailto:linux-howto@metalab.unc.edu
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="Proxy-Caching">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="NTP">
|
||
|
||
<title>NTP</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Time synchorinisation is generally considered important in the computing
|
||
environment. There are a number of reasons why this is important: it makes
|
||
sure your scheduled cron tasks on your various servers run well together,
|
||
it allows better use of log files between various machines to help
|
||
troubleshoot problems, and synchronised, correct logs are also useful if
|
||
your servers are ever attacked by crackers (either to report the attempt
|
||
to organisations such as AusCERT or in court to use against the bad guys).
|
||
Users who have overclocked their machine might also use time synchronisation
|
||
techniques to bring the time on their machines back to an accurate figure
|
||
at regular intervals, say every 20 minutes of so. This section contains an
|
||
overview of time keeping under Linux and some information about NTP, a
|
||
protocol which can be used to accurately reset the time across a computer
|
||
network.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
2. How Linux Keeps Track of Time
|
||
|
||
2.1. Basic Strategies
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
A Linux system actually has two clocks: One is the battery powered
|
||
"Real Time Clock" (also known as the "RTC", "CMOS clock", or "Hardware
|
||
clock") which keeps track of time when the system is turned off but is
|
||
not used when the system is running. The other is the "system clock"
|
||
(sometimes called the "kernel clock" or "software clock") which is a
|
||
software counter based on the timer interrupt. It does not exist when
|
||
the system is not running, so it has to be initialized from the RTC
|
||
(or some other time source) at boot time. References to "the clock" in
|
||
the ntpd documentation refer to the system clock, not the RTC.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
The two clocks will drift at different rates, so they will gradually
|
||
drift apart from each other, and also away from the "real" time. The
|
||
simplest way to keep them on time is to measure their drift rates and
|
||
apply correction factors in software. Since the RTC is only used when
|
||
the system is not running, the correction factor is applied when the
|
||
clock is read at boot time, using clock(8) or hwclock(8). The system
|
||
clock is corrected by adjusting the rate at which the system time is
|
||
advanced with each timer interrupt, using adjtimex(8).
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
A crude alternative to adjtimex(8) is to have chron run clock(8) or
|
||
hwclock(8) periodically to sync the system time to the (corrected)
|
||
RTC. This was recommended in the clock(8) man page, and it works if
|
||
you do it often enough that you don't cause large "jumps" in the
|
||
system time, but adjtimex(8) is a more elegant solution. Some
|
||
applications may complain if the time jumps backwards.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
The next step up in accuracy is to use a program like ntpd to read the
|
||
time periodically from a network time server or radio clock, and
|
||
continuously adjust the rate of the system clock so that the times
|
||
always match, without causing sudden "jumps" in the system time. If
|
||
you always have a network connection at boot time, you can ignore the
|
||
RTC completely and use ntpdate (which comes with the ntpd package) to
|
||
initialize the system clock from a time server-- either a local server
|
||
on a LAN, or a remote server on the internet. But if you sometimes
|
||
don't have a network connection, or if you need the time to be
|
||
accurate during the boot sequence before the network is active, then
|
||
you need to maintain the time in the RTC as well.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
2.2. Potential Conflicts
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
It might seem obvious that if you're using a program like ntpd, you
|
||
would want to sync the RTC to the (corrected) system clock. But this
|
||
turns out to be a bad idea if the system is going to stay shut down
|
||
longer than a few minutes, because it interferes with the programs
|
||
that apply the correction factor to the RTC at boot time.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
If the system runs 24/7 and is always rebooted immediately whenever
|
||
it's shut down, then you can just set the RTC from the system clock
|
||
right before you reboot. The RTC won't drift enough to make a
|
||
difference in the time it takes to reboot, so you don't need to know
|
||
its drift rate.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Of course the system may go down unexpectedly, so some versions of the
|
||
kernel sync the RTC to the system clock every 11 minutes if the system
|
||
clock has been adjusted by another program. The RTC won't drift enough
|
||
in 11 minutes to make any difference, but if the system is down long
|
||
enough for the RTC to drift significantly, then you have a problem:
|
||
the programs that apply the drift correction to the RTC need to know
|
||
*exactly* when it was last reset, and the kernel doesn't record that
|
||
information anywhere.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Some unix "traditionalists" might wonder why anyone would run a linux
|
||
system less than 24/7, but some of us run dual-boot systems with
|
||
another OS running some of the time, or run Linux on laptops that have
|
||
to be shut down to conserve battery power when they're not being used.
|
||
Other people just don't like to leave machines running unattended for
|
||
long periods of time (even though we've heard all the arguments in
|
||
favor of it). So the "every 11 minutes" feature becomes a bug.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
This "feature/bug" appears to behave differently in different versions
|
||
of the kernel (and possibly in different versions of xntpd and ntpd as
|
||
well), so if you're running both ntpd and hwclock you may need to test
|
||
your system to see what it actually does. If you can't keep the kernel
|
||
from resetting the RTC, you might have to run without a correction
|
||
factor on the RTC.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
The part of the kernel that controls this can be found in
|
||
/usr/src/linux-2.0.34/arch/i386/kernel/time.c (where the version
|
||
number in the path will be the version of the kernel you're running).
|
||
If the variable time_status is set to TIME_OK then the kernel will
|
||
write the system time to the RTC every 11 minutes, otherwise it leaves
|
||
the RTC alone. Calls to adjtimex(2) (as used by ntpd and timed, for
|
||
example) may turn this on. Calls to settimeofday(2) will set
|
||
time_status to TIME_UNSYNC, which tells the kernel not to adjust the
|
||
RTC. I have not found any real documentation on this.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
I've heard reports that some versions of the kernel may have problems
|
||
with "sleep modes" that shut down the CPU to save energy. The best
|
||
solution is to keep your kernel up to date, and refer any problems to
|
||
the people who maintain the kernel.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
If you get bizarre results from the RTC you may have a hardware
|
||
problem. Some RTC chips include a lithium battery that can run down,
|
||
and some motherboards have an option for an external battery (be sure
|
||
the jumper is set correctly). The same battery maintains the CMOS RAM,
|
||
but the clock takes more power and is likely to fail first. Bizarre
|
||
results from the system clock may mean there is a problem with
|
||
interrupts.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
2.3. Should the RTC use Local Time or UTC, and What About DST?
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
The Linux "system clock" actually just counts the number of seconds
|
||
past Jan 1, 1970, and is always in UTC (or GMT, which is technically
|
||
different but close enough that casual users tend to use both terms
|
||
interchangeably). UTC does not change as DST comes and goes-- what
|
||
changes is the conversion between UTC and local time. The translation
|
||
to local time is done by library functions that are linked into the
|
||
application programs.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
This has two consequences: First, any application that needs to know
|
||
the local time also needs to know what time zone you're in, and
|
||
whether DST is in effect or not (see the next section for more on time
|
||
zones). Second, there is no provision in the kernel to change either
|
||
the system clock or the RTC as DST comes and goes, because UTC doesn't
|
||
change. Therefore, machines that only run Linux should have the RTC
|
||
set to UTC, not local time.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
However, many people run dual-boot systems with other OS's that expect
|
||
the RTC to contain the local time, so hwclock needs to know whether
|
||
your RTC is in local time or UTC, which it then converts to seconds
|
||
past Jan 1, 1970 (UTC). This still does not provide for seasonal
|
||
changes to the RTC, so the change must be made by the other OS (this
|
||
is the one exception to the rule against letting more than one program
|
||
change the time in the RTC).
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Unfortunately, there are no flags in the RTC or the CMOS RAM to
|
||
indicate standard time vs DST, so each OS stores this information
|
||
someplace where the other OS's can't find it. This means that hwclock
|
||
must assume that the RTC always contains the correct local time, even
|
||
if the other OS has not been run since the most recent seasonal time
|
||
change.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
If Linux is running when the seasonal time change occurs, the system
|
||
clock is unaffected and applications will make the correct conversion.
|
||
But if linux has to be rebooted for any reason, the system clock will
|
||
be set to the time in the RTC, which will be off by one hour until the
|
||
other OS (usually Windows) has a chance to run.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
There is no way around this, but Linux doesn't crash very often, so
|
||
the most likely reason to reboot on a dual-boot system is to run the
|
||
other OS anyway. But beware if you're one of those people who shuts
|
||
down Linux whenever you won't be using it for a while-- if you haven't
|
||
had a chance to run the other OS since the last time change, the RTC
|
||
will be off by an hour until you do.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Some other documents have stated that setting the RTC to UTC allows
|
||
Linux to take care of DST properly. This is not really wrong, but it
|
||
doesn't tell the whole story-- as long as you don't reboot, it does
|
||
not matter which time is in the RTC (or even if the RTC's battery
|
||
dies). Linux will maintain the correct time either way, until the next
|
||
reboot. In theory, if you only reboot once a year (which is not
|
||
unreasonable for Linux), DST could come and go and you'd never notice
|
||
that the RTC had been wrong for several months, because the system
|
||
clock would have stayed correct all along. But since you can't predict
|
||
when you'll want to reboot, it's better to have the RTC set to UTC if
|
||
you're not running another OS that requires local time.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
The Dallas Semiconductor RTC chip (which is a drop-in replacement for
|
||
the Motorola chip used in the IBM AT and clones) actually has the
|
||
ability to do the DST conversion by itself, but this feature is not
|
||
used because the changeover dates are hard-wired into the chip and
|
||
can't be changed. Current versions change on the first Sunday in April
|
||
and the last Sunday in October, but earlier versions used different
|
||
dates (and obviously this doesn't work in countries that use other
|
||
dates). Also, the RTC is often integrated into the motherboard's
|
||
"chipset" (rather than being a separate chip) and I don't know if they
|
||
all have this ability.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
2.4. How Linux keeps Track of Time Zones
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
You probably set your time zone correctly when you installed Linux.
|
||
But if you have to change it for some reason, or if the local laws
|
||
regarding DST have changed (as they do frequently in some countries),
|
||
then you'll need to know how to change it. If your system time is off
|
||
by some exact number of hours, you may have a time zone problem (or a
|
||
DST problem).
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Time zone and DST information is stored in /usr/share/zoneinfo (or
|
||
/usr/lib/zoneinfo on older systems). The local time zone is
|
||
determined by a symbolic link from /etc/localtime to one of these
|
||
files. The way to change your timezone is to change the link. If
|
||
your local DST dates have changed, you'll have to edit the file.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
You can also use the TZ environment variable to change the current
|
||
time zone, which is handy of you're logged in remotely to a machine in
|
||
another time zone. Also see the man pages for tzset and tzfile.
|
||
This is nicely summarized at
|
||
<http://www.linuxsa.org.au/tips/time.html>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
2.5. The Bottom Line
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
If you don't need sub-second accuracy, hwclock(8) and adjtimex(8) may
|
||
be all you need. It's easy to get enthused about time servers and
|
||
radio clocks and so on, but I ran the old clock(8) program for years
|
||
with excellent results. On the other hand, if you have several
|
||
machines on a LAN it can be handy (and sometimes essential) to have
|
||
them automatically sync their clocks to each other. And the other
|
||
stuff can be fun to play with even if you don't really need it.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
On machines that only run Linux, set the RTC to UTC (or GMT). On
|
||
dual-boot systems that require local time in the RTC, be aware that if
|
||
you have to reboot Linux after the seasonal time change, the clock may
|
||
be temporarily off by one hour, until you have a chance to run the
|
||
other OS. If you run more than two OS's, be sure only one of them is
|
||
trying to adjust for DST.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
NTP is a standard method of synchronising time on a client from a remote
|
||
server across the network. NTP clients are typically installed on servers.
|
||
NTP is a standard method of synchronising time across a network of
|
||
computers. NTP clients are typically installed on servers.
|
||
Most business class ISPs provide NTP servers. Otherwise, there are a
|
||
number of free NTP servers in Australia:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
The Univeristy of Melbourne ntp.cs.mu.oz.au
|
||
University of Adelaide ntp.saard.net
|
||
CSIRO Marine Labs, Tasmania ntp.ml.csiro.au
|
||
CSIRO National Measurements Laboratory, Sydney ntp.syd.dms.csiro.au
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Xntpd (NTPv3) has been replaced by ntpd (NTPv4); the earlier version
|
||
is no longer being maintained.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
</para>
|
||
Ntpd is the standard program for synchronizing clocks across a
|
||
network, and it comes with a list of public time servers you can
|
||
connect to. It can be a little more complicated to set up, but if
|
||
you're interested in this kind of thing I highly recommend that you
|
||
take a look at it.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
The "home base" for information on ntpd is the NTP website at
|
||
<http://www.eecis.udel.edu/~ntp/> which also includes links to all
|
||
kinds of interesting time-related stuff (including software for other
|
||
OS's). Some linux distributions include ntpd on the CD. There is a
|
||
list of public time servers at
|
||
<http://www.eecis.udel.edu/~mills/ntp/clock2.html>.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
A relatively new feature in ntpd is a "burst mode" which is designed
|
||
for machines that have only intermittent dial-up access to the
|
||
internet.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Ntpd includes drivers for quite a few radio clocks (although some
|
||
appear to be better supported than others). Most radio clocks are
|
||
designed for commercial use and cost thousands of dollars, but there
|
||
are some cheaper alternatives (discussed in later sections). In the
|
||
past most were WWV or WWVB receivers, but now most of them seem to be
|
||
GPS receivers. NIST has a PDF file that lists manufacturers of radio
|
||
clocks on their website at
|
||
<http://www.boulder.nist.gov/timefreq/links.htm> (near the bottom of
|
||
the page). The NTP website also includes many links to manufacturers
|
||
of radio clocks at <http://www.eecis.udel.edu/~ntp/hardware.htm> and
|
||
<http://www.eecis.udel.edu/~mills/ntp/refclock.htm>. Either list may
|
||
or may not be up to date at any given time :-). The list of drivers
|
||
for ntpd is at
|
||
<http://www.eecis.udel.edu/~ntp/ntp_spool/html/refclock.htm>.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Ntpd also includes drivers for several dial-up time services. These
|
||
are all long-distance (toll) calls, so be sure to calculate the effect
|
||
on your phone bill before using them.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
3.4. Chrony
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Xntpd was originally written for machines that have a full-time
|
||
connection to a network time server or radio clock. In theory it can
|
||
also be used with machines that are only connected intermittently, but
|
||
Richard Curnow couldn't get it to work the way he wanted it to, so he
|
||
wrote "chrony" as an alternative for those of us who only have network
|
||
access when we're dialed in to an ISP (this is the same problem that
|
||
ntpd's new "burst mode" was designed to solve). The current version
|
||
of chrony includes drift correction for the RTC, for machines that are
|
||
turned off for long periods of time.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
You can get more information from Richard Curnow's website at
|
||
<http://www.rrbcurnow.freeuk.com/chrony> or <http://go.to/chrony>.
|
||
There are also two chrony mailing lists, one for announcements and one
|
||
for discussion by users. For information send email to chrony-users-
|
||
subscribe@egroups.com or chrony-announce-subscribe@egroups.com
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Chrony is normally distributed as source code only, but Debian has
|
||
been including a binary in their "unstable" collection. The source
|
||
file is also available at the usual Linux archive sites.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
3.5. Clockspeed
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Another option is the clockspeed program by DJ Bernstein. It gets the
|
||
time from a network time server and simply resets the system clock
|
||
every three seconds. It can also be used to synchronize several
|
||
machines on a LAN.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
I've sometimes had trouble reaching his website at
|
||
<http://Cr.yp.to/clockspeed.html>, so if you get a DNS error try again
|
||
on another day. I'll try to update this section if I get some better
|
||
information.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Note
|
||
You must be logged in as "root" to run any program that affects
|
||
the RTC or the system time, which includes most of the programs
|
||
described here. If you normally use a graphical interface for
|
||
everything, you may also need to learn some basic unix shell
|
||
commands.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Note
|
||
If you run more than one OS on your machine, you should only let
|
||
one of them set the RTC, so they don't confuse each other. The
|
||
exception is the twice-a-year adjustment for Daylight Saving(s)
|
||
Time.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
If you run a dual-boot system that spends a lot of time running
|
||
Windows, you may want to check out some of the clock software
|
||
available for that OS instead. Follow the links on the NTP website at
|
||
<http://www.eecis.udel.edu/~ntp/software.html>.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="NTP">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="Traffic-Control">
|
||
|
||
8.6. Traffic Shaping
|
||
|
||
The traffic shaper is a virtual network device that makes it possible
|
||
to limit the rate of outgoing data flow over another network device.
|
||
This is especially useful in scenarios such as ISPs, where it is
|
||
desirable to control and enforce policies regarding how much bandwidth
|
||
is used by each client. Another alternative (for web services only)
|
||
may be certain Apache modules which restrict the number of IP
|
||
connections by client or the bandwidth used.
|
||
|
||
<title>Traffic-Control</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Traffic control encompasses the sets of mechanisms and operations by which
|
||
packets are queued for transmission/reception on a network interface. The
|
||
operations include enqueuing, policing, classifying, scheduling, shaping and
|
||
dropping. This HOWTO provides an introduction and overview of the
|
||
capabilities and implementation of traffic control under Linux.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> the linux DiffServ project
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> HTB site (Martin "devik" Devera)
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> Traffic Control Next Generation (tcng)
|
||
|
||
TCNG manual (Werner Almesberger)
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> iproute2 (Alexey Kuznetsov)
|
||
|
||
iproute2 manual (Alexey Kuznetsov)
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> Research and documentation on traffic control under linux (Stef Coene)
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> LARTC HOWTO (bert hubert, et. al.)
|
||
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A> guide to IP networking with linux (Martin A. Brown)
|
||
|
||
* http://metalab.unc.edu/mdw/HOWTO/NET3-4-HOWTO-6.html#ss6.15
|
||
|
||
* Traffic Control HOWTO
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="Traffic-Control">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="Load-Balancing">
|
||
|
||
<title>Load-Balancing</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Demand for load balancing usually arises in database/web access when
|
||
many clients make simultaneous requests to a server. It would be
|
||
desirable to have multiple identical servers and redirect requests to
|
||
the less loaded server. This can be achieved through Network Address
|
||
Translation techniques (NAT) of which IP masquerading is a subset.
|
||
Network administrators can replace a single server providing Web
|
||
services - or any other application - with a logical pool of servers
|
||
sharing a common IP address. Incoming connections are directed to a
|
||
particular server using one load-balancing algorithm. The virtual
|
||
server rewrites incoming and outgoing packets to give clients the
|
||
appearance that only one server exists.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Linux IP-NAT information may be found here <http://www.csn.tu-
|
||
chemnitz.de/HyperNews/get/linux-ip-nat.html>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="Load-Balancing">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="Bandwidth-Limiting">
|
||
|
||
<title>Bandwidth-Limiting</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
This section describes how to set up your Linux server to limit download
|
||
bandwidth or incoming traffic and how to use your internet link more
|
||
efficiently. It is meant to provide an easy solution for limiting
|
||
incoming traffic, thus preventing our LAN users from consuming all the
|
||
bandwidth of our internet link. This is useful when our internet link
|
||
is slow or our LAN users download tons of mp3s and the newest Linux
|
||
distro's *.iso files.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
* Bandwidth Limiting HOWTO
|
||
|
||
6. Miscellaneous
|
||
|
||
6.1. Useful resources
|
||
|
||
Squid Web Proxy Cache
|
||
[http://www.squid-cache.org] http://www.squid-cache.org
|
||
|
||
Squid 2.4 Stable 1 Configuration manual
|
||
[http://www.visolve.com/squidman/Configuration%20Guide.html] http://
|
||
www.visolve.com/squidman/Configuration%20Guide.html
|
||
[http://www.visolve.com/squidman/Delaypool%20parameters.htm] http://
|
||
www.visolve.com/squidman/Delaypool%20parameters.htm
|
||
|
||
Squid FAQ
|
||
[http://www.squid-cache.org/Doc/FAQ/FAQ-19.html#ss19.8] http://
|
||
www.squid-cache.org/Doc/FAQ/FAQ-19.html#ss19.8
|
||
|
||
cbq-init script
|
||
[ftp://ftp.equinox.gu.net/pub/linux/cbq/] ftp://ftp.equinox.gu.net/pub/linux/
|
||
cbq/
|
||
|
||
Linux 2.4 Advanced Routing HOWTO
|
||
[http://www.linuxdoc.org/HOWTO/Adv-Routing-HOWTO.html] http://
|
||
www.linuxdoc.org/HOWTO/Adv-Routing-HOWTO.html
|
||
|
||
Traffic control (in Polish)
|
||
[http://ceti.pl/~kravietz/cbq/] http://ceti.pl/~kravietz/cbq/
|
||
|
||
Securing and Optimizing Linux Red Hat Edition - A Hands on Guide
|
||
[http://www.linuxdoc.org/guides.html] http://www.linuxdoc.org/guides.html
|
||
|
||
IPTraf
|
||
[http://cebu.mozcom.com/riker/iptraf/] http://cebu.mozcom.com/riker/iptraf/
|
||
|
||
IPCHAINS
|
||
[http://www.linuxdoc.org/HOWTO/IPCHAINS-HOWTO.html] http://www.linuxdoc.org/
|
||
HOWTO/IPCHAINS-HOWTO.html
|
||
|
||
Nylon socks proxy server
|
||
[http://mesh.eecs.umich.edu/projects/nylon/] http://mesh.eecs.umich.edu/
|
||
projects/nylon/
|
||
|
||
Indonesian translation of this HOWTO by Rahmat Rafiudin mjl_id@yahoo.com
|
||
[http://raf.unisba.ac.id/resources/BandwidthLimitingHOWTO/index.html] http://
|
||
raf.unisba.ac.id/resources/BandwidthLimitingHOWTO/index.html
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="Bandwidth-Limiting">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="Compressed-TCP">
|
||
|
||
<title>Compressed-TCP</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
In the past, we used to compress files in order to save disk space.
|
||
Today, disk space is cheap - but bandwidth is limited. By compressing
|
||
data streams such as TCP/IP-Sessions using SSH-like tools, you achieve
|
||
two goals:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
1) You save bandwidth/transfered volume (that is important if you have
|
||
to pay for traffic or if your network is loaded.).
|
||
2) Speeding up low-bandwidth connections (Modem, GSM, ISDN).
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
This HowTo explains how to save both bandwith and connection time by
|
||
using tools like SSH1, SSH2, OpenSSH or LSH.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
2. Compressing HTTP/FTP,...
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
My office is connected with a 64KBit ISDN line to the internet, so the
|
||
maximum transfer rate is about 7K/s. You can speed up the connection
|
||
by compressing it: when I download files, Netscape shows up a transfer
|
||
rate of up to 40K/s (Logfiles are compressable by factor 15). SSH is a
|
||
tool that is mainly designed to build up secure connections over
|
||
unsecured networks. Further more, SSH is able to compress connections
|
||
and to do port forwarding (like rinetd or redir). So it is the
|
||
appropriate tool to compress any simple TCP/IP connection. "Simple"
|
||
means, that only one TCP-connection is opened. An FTP-connections or
|
||
the connection between M$-Outlook and MS-Exchange are not simple as
|
||
several connections are established. SSH uses the LempleZiv (LZ77)
|
||
compression algorithm - so you will achieve the same high compression
|
||
rate as winzip/pkzip. In order to compress all HTTP-connections from
|
||
my intranet to the internet, I just have to execute one command on my
|
||
dial-in machine:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
ssh -l <login ID> <hostname> -C -L8080:<proxy_at_ISP>:80 -f sleep
|
||
10000
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
<hostname> = host that is located at my ISP. SSH-access is required.
|
||
<login ID> = my login-ID on <hostname>
|
||
<proxy_at_ISP> = the web proxy of my ISP
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
My browser is configured to use localhost:8080 as proxy. My laptop
|
||
connects to the same socket. The connection is compressed and
|
||
forwarded to the real proxy by SSH. The infrastructure looks like:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
64KBit ISDN
|
||
My PC--------------------------------A PC (Unix/Linux/Win-NT) at my ISP
|
||
SSH-Client compressed SSH-Server, Port 22
|
||
Port 8080 |
|
||
| |
|
||
| |
|
||
| |
|
||
|10MBit Ethernet |100MBit
|
||
|not compressed |not compressed
|
||
| |
|
||
| |
|
||
My second PC ISP's WWW-proxy
|
||
with Netscape,... Port 80
|
||
(Laptop)
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
3. Compressing Email
|
||
|
||
3.1. Incoming Emails (POP3, IMAP4)
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Most people fetch their email from the mailserver via POP3. POP3 is a
|
||
protocol with many disadvantages:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
1. POP3 transfers password in clear text. (There are SSL-
|
||
implementations of POP/IMAP and a challenge/response
|
||
authentication, defined in RFC-2095/2195).
|
||
|
||
2. POP3 causes much protocol overhead: first the client requests a
|
||
message than the server sends the message. After that the client
|
||
requests the transferred article to be deleted. The server confirms
|
||
the deletion. After that the server is ready for the next
|
||
transaction. So 4 transactions are needed for each email.
|
||
|
||
3. POP3 transfers the mails without compression although email is
|
||
highly compressible (factor=3.5).
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
You could compress POP3 by forwarding localhost:110 through a
|
||
compressed connection to your ISP's POP3-socket. After that you have
|
||
to tell your mail client to connect to localhost:110 in order to
|
||
download mail. That secures and speeds up the connection -- but the
|
||
download time still suffers from the POP3-inherent protocol overhead.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
It makes sense to substitute POP3 by a more efficient protocol. The
|
||
idea is to download the entire mailbox at once without generating
|
||
protocol overhead. Furthermore it makes sense to compress the
|
||
connections. The appropriate tool which offers both features is SCP.
|
||
You can download your mail-file like this:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
scp -C -l loginId:/var/spool/mail/loginid /tmp/newmail
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
But there is a problem: what happens if a new email arrives at the
|
||
server during the download of your mailbox? The new mail would be
|
||
lost. Therefore it makes more sense to use the following commands:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
ssh -l loginid mailserver -f mv /var/spool/mail/loginid
|
||
/tmp/loginid_fetchme
|
||
scp -C -l loginid:/tmp/my_new_mail /tmp/loginid_fetchme
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
A move (mv) is a elementary operation, so you won't get into truble if
|
||
you receive new mail during the execution of the commands. But if the
|
||
mail server directories /tmp/ and /var/spool/mail are not on the same
|
||
disc you might get problems. A solution is to create a lockfile on the
|
||
server before you execute the mv: touch /var/spool/mail/loginid.lock.
|
||
You should remove it, after that. A better solution is to move the
|
||
file loginid in the same directory:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
ssh -l loginid mailserver -f mv /var/spool/mail/loginid
|
||
/var/spool/mail/loginid_fetchme
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
After that you can use formail instead of procmail in order to filter
|
||
/tmp/newmail into the right folder(s):
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
formail -s procmail < /tmp/newmail
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
3.2. Outgoing Email (SMTP)
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
You send email over compresses and encrypted SSH-connections, in order
|
||
to:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<20> Save network traffic
|
||
<20> Secure the connection (This does not make sense, if the mail is
|
||
transported over untrusted networks, later.)
|
||
<20> Authenticate the sender. Many mail servers deny mail relaying in
|
||
order to prevent abuse. If you send an email over an SSH-
|
||
connection, the remote mail server (i.e. sendmail or MS-exchange)
|
||
thinks to be connected, locally.
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
If you have SSH-access on the mail server, you need the following
|
||
command:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
ssh -C -l loginid mailserver -L2525:mailserver:25
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
If you don't have SSH-access on the mail server but to a server that
|
||
is allowed to use your mail server as relay, the command is:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
ssh -C -l loginid other_server -L2525:mailserver:25
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
After that you can configure your mail client (or mail server: see
|
||
"smarthost") to send out mails to localhost port 2525.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
4. Thoughts about performance.
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Of course compression/encryption takes CPU time. It turned out that an
|
||
old Pentium-133 is able to encrypt and compress about 1GB/hour --
|
||
that's quite a lot. If you compile SSH with the option "--with-none"
|
||
you can tell SSH to use no encryption. That saves a little
|
||
performance. Here is a comprison between several download methods
|
||
(during the test, a noncompressed 6MB-file was transfered from a
|
||
133MHz-Pentium-1 to a 233MHz Pentium2 laptop over a 10MBit ethernet
|
||
without other load).
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
+-------------------+--------+----------+-----------+----------------------+
|
||
| | FTP |encrypted |compressed |compressed & encrypted|
|
||
+-------------------+--------+----------+-----------+----------------------+
|
||
| Elapsed Time | 17.6s | 26s | 9s | 23s |
|
||
+-------------------+--------+----------+-----------+----------------------+
|
||
| Throughput | 790K/s | 232K/s | 320K/s | 264K/s |
|
||
+-------------------+--------+----------+-----------+----------------------+
|
||
|Compression Factor | 1 | 1 | 3.8 | 3.8 |
|
||
+-------------------+--------+----------+-----------+----------------------+
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="Compressed-TCP">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="IP-Accounting">
|
||
|
||
<title>IP-Accounting</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
This option of the Linux kernel keeps track of IP network traffic,
|
||
performs packet logging and produces some statistics. A series of
|
||
rules may be defined so when a packet matches a given pattern, some
|
||
action is performed: a counter is increased, it is accepted/rejected,
|
||
etc.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
6.3. IP Accounting (for Linux-2.0)
|
||
The IP accounting features of the Linux kernel allow you to collect
|
||
and analyze some network usage data. The data collected comprises the
|
||
number of packets and the number of bytes accumulated since the
|
||
figures were last reset. You may specify a variety of rules to
|
||
categorize the figures to suit whatever purpose you may have. This
|
||
option has been removed in kernel 2.1.102, because the old ipfwadm-
|
||
based firewalling was replaced by ``ipfwchains''.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
Kernel Compile Options:
|
||
|
||
Networking options --->
|
||
[*] IP: accounting
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
After you have compiled and installed the kernel you need to use the
|
||
ipfwadm command to configure IP accounting. There are many different
|
||
ways of breaking down the accounting information that you might
|
||
choose. I've picked a simple example of what might be useful to use,
|
||
you should read the ipfwadm man page for more information.
|
||
Scenario: You have a ethernet network that is linked to the internet
|
||
via a PPP link. On the ethernet you have a machine that offers a
|
||
number of services and that you are interested in knowing how much
|
||
traffic is generated by each of ftp and world wide web traffic, as
|
||
well as total tcp and udp traffic.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
You might use a command set that looks like the following, which is
|
||
shown as a shell script:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
#!/bin/sh
|
||
#
|
||
# Flush the accounting rules
|
||
ipfwadm -A -f
|
||
#
|
||
# Set shortcuts
|
||
localnet=44.136.8.96/29
|
||
any=0/0
|
||
# Add rules for local ethernet segment
|
||
ipfwadm -A in -a -P tcp -D $localnet ftp-data
|
||
ipfwadm -A out -a -P tcp -S $localnet ftp-data
|
||
ipfwadm -A in -a -P tcp -D $localnet www
|
||
ipfwadm -A out -a -P tcp -S $localnet www
|
||
ipfwadm -A in -a -P tcp -D $localnet
|
||
ipfwadm -A out -a -P tcp -S $localnet
|
||
ipfwadm -A in -a -P udp -D $localnet
|
||
ipfwadm -A out -a -P udp -S $localnet
|
||
#
|
||
# Rules for default
|
||
ipfwadm -A in -a -P tcp -D $any ftp-data
|
||
ipfwadm -A out -a -P tcp -S $any ftp-data
|
||
ipfwadm -A in -a -P tcp -D $any www
|
||
ipfwadm -A out -a -P tcp -S $any www
|
||
ipfwadm -A in -a -P tcp -D $any
|
||
ipfwadm -A out -a -P tcp -S $any
|
||
ipfwadm -A in -a -P udp -D $any
|
||
ipfwadm -A out -a -P udp -S $any
|
||
#
|
||
# List the rules
|
||
ipfwadm -A -l -n
|
||
#
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
The names ``ftp-data'' and ``www'' refer to lines in /etc/services.
|
||
The last command lists each of the Accounting rules and displays the
|
||
collected totals.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
An important point to note when analyzing IP accounting is that totals
|
||
for all rules that match will be incremented so that to obtain
|
||
differential figures you need to perform appropriate maths. For
|
||
example if I wanted to know how much data was not ftp nor www I would
|
||
substract the individual totals from the rule that matches all ports.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
root# ipfwadm -A -l -n
|
||
IP accounting rules
|
||
pkts bytes dir prot source destination ports
|
||
0 0 in tcp 0.0.0.0/0 44.136.8.96/29 * -> 20
|
||
0 0 out tcp 44.136.8.96/29 0.0.0.0/0 20 -> *
|
||
10 1166 in tcp 0.0.0.0/0 44.136.8.96/29 * -> 80
|
||
10 572 out tcp 44.136.8.96/29 0.0.0.0/0 80 -> *
|
||
252 10943 in tcp 0.0.0.0/0 44.136.8.96/29 * -> *
|
||
231 18831 out tcp 44.136.8.96/29 0.0.0.0/0 * -> *
|
||
0 0 in udp 0.0.0.0/0 44.136.8.96/29 * -> *
|
||
0 0 out udp 44.136.8.96/29 0.0.0.0/0 * -> *
|
||
0 0 in tcp 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 * -> 20
|
||
0 0 out tcp 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 20 -> *
|
||
10 1166 in tcp 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 * -> 80
|
||
10 572 out tcp 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 80 -> *
|
||
253 10983 in tcp 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 * -> *
|
||
231 18831 out tcp 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 * -> *
|
||
0 0 in udp 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 * -> *
|
||
0 0 out udp 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 * -> *
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
6.4. IP Accounting (for Linux-2.2)
|
||
|
||
The new accounting code is accessed via ``IP Firewall Chains''. See
|
||
the IP chains home page for more information. Among other things,
|
||
you'll now need to use ipchains instead of ipfwadm to configure your
|
||
filters. (From Documentation/Changes in the latest kernel sources).
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="IP-Accounting">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="IP-Aliasing">
|
||
|
||
<title>IP-Aliasing</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
This is a cookbook recipe on how to set up and run IP aliasing on a Linux box
|
||
and how to set up the machine to receive e-mail on the aliased IP addresses.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
This feature of the Linux kernel provides the possibility of setting
|
||
multiple network addresses on the same low-level network device driver
|
||
(e.g two IP addresses in one Ethernet card). It is typically used for
|
||
services that act differently based on the address they listen on
|
||
(e.g. "multihosting" or "virtual domains" or "virtual hosting
|
||
services".
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
There are some applications where being able to configure multiple IP
|
||
addresses to a single network device is useful. Internet Service
|
||
Providers often use this facility to provide a `customized' to their
|
||
World Wide Web and ftp offerings for their customers. You can refer to
|
||
the ``IP-Alias mini-HOWTO'' for more information than you find here.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Quickstart:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
After compiling and installing your kernel with IP_Alias support
|
||
configuration is very simple. The aliases are added to virtual network
|
||
devices associated with the actual network device. A simple naming
|
||
convention applies to these devices being <devname>:<virtual dev num>,
|
||
e.g. eth0:0, ppp0:10 etc. Note that the the ifname:number device can
|
||
only be configured after the main interface has been set up.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
For example, assume you have an ethernet network that supports two
|
||
different IP subnetworks simultaneously and you wish your machine to
|
||
have direct access to both, you could use something like:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
root# ifconfig eth0 192.168.1.1 netmask 255.255.255.0 up
|
||
root# route add -net 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 eth0
|
||
root# ifconfig eth0:0 192.168.10.1 netmask 255.255.255.0 up
|
||
root# route add -net 192.168.10.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 eth0:0
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
<para>
|
||
1. My Setup
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>IP Alias is standard in kernels 2.0.x and 2.2.x, and available as a
|
||
compile-time option in 2.4.x (IP Alias has been deprecated in 2.4.x and
|
||
replaced by a more powerful firewalling mechanism.)
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>IP Alias compiled as a loadable module. You would have indicated in the
|
||
"make config" command to make your kernel, that you want the IP Masq to
|
||
be compiled as a (M)odule. Check the Modules HOW-TO (if that exists) or
|
||
check the info in /usr/src/linux/Documentation/modules.txt.
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>I have to support 2 additional IPs over and above the IP already
|
||
allocated to me.
|
||
<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>*<2A>A D-Link DE620 pocket adapter (not important, works with any Linux
|
||
supported network adapter).
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
Kernel Compile Options:
|
||
|
||
Networking options --->
|
||
....
|
||
[*] Network aliasing
|
||
....
|
||
<*> IP: aliasing support
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
2. Commands
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
1. Load the IP Alias module (you can skip this step if you compiled the
|
||
module into the kernel):
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
/sbin/insmod /lib/modules/`uname -r`/ipv4/ip_alias.o
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
2. Setup the loopback, eth0, and all the IP addresses beginning with the
|
||
main IP address for the eth0 interface:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
/sbin/ifconfig lo 127.0.0.1
|
||
/sbin/ifconfig eth0 up
|
||
/sbin/ifconfig eth0 172.16.3.1
|
||
/sbin/ifconfig eth0:0 172.16.3.10
|
||
/sbin/ifconfig eth0:1 172.16.3.100
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
172.16.3.1 is the main IP address, while .10 and .100 are the aliases.
|
||
The magic is the eth0:x where x=0,1,2,...n for the different IP
|
||
addresses. The main IP address does not need to be aliased.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
3. Setup the routes. First route the loopback, then the net, and finally,
|
||
the various IP addresses starting with the default (originally allocated)
|
||
one:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
/sbin/route add -net 127.0.0.0
|
||
/sbin/route add -net 172.16.3.0 dev eth0
|
||
/sbin/route add -host 172.16.3.1 dev eth0
|
||
/sbin/route add -host 172.16.3.10 dev eth0:0
|
||
/sbin/route add -host 172.16.3.100 dev eth0:1
|
||
/sbin/route add default gw 172.16.3.200
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
That's it.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
In the example IP address above, I am using the Private IP addresses (RFC
|
||
1918) for illustrative purposes. Substitute them with your own official or
|
||
private IP addresses.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
The example shows only 3 IP addresses. The max is defined to be 256 in /usr/
|
||
include/linux/net_alias.h. 256 IP addresses on ONE card is a lot :-)!
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Here's what my /sbin/ifconfig looks like:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
lo Link encap:Local Loopback
|
||
inet addr:127.0.0.1 Bcast:127.255.255.255 Mask:255.0.0.0
|
||
UP BROADCAST LOOPBACK RUNNING MTU:3584 Metric:1
|
||
RX packets:5088 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0
|
||
TX packets:5088 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0
|
||
|
||
eth0 Link encap:10Mbps Ethernet HWaddr 00:8E:B8:83:19:20
|
||
inet addr:172.16.3.1 Bcast:172.16.3.255 Mask:255.255.255.0
|
||
UP BROADCAST RUNNING PROMISC MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
|
||
RX packets:334036 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0
|
||
TX packets:11605 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0
|
||
Interrupt:7 Base address:0x378
|
||
|
||
eth0:0 Link encap:10Mbps Ethernet HWaddr 00:8E:B8:83:19:20
|
||
inet addr:172.16.3.10 Bcast:172.16.3.255 Mask:255.255.255.0
|
||
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MTU:1500 Metric:1
|
||
RX packets:0 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0
|
||
TX packets:0 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0
|
||
|
||
eth0:1 Link encap:10Mbps Ethernet HWaddr 00:8E:B8:83:19:20
|
||
inet addr:172.16.3.100 Bcast:172.16.3.255 Mask:255.255.255.0
|
||
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MTU:1500 Metric:1
|
||
RX packets:1 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0
|
||
TX packets:0 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
And /proc/net/aliases:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
device family address
|
||
eth0:0 2 172.16.3.10
|
||
eth0:1 2 172.16.3.100
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
And /proc/net/alias_types:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
type name n_attach
|
||
2 ip 2
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Of course, the stuff in /proc/net was created by the ifconfig command and not
|
||
by hand!
|
||
</para>
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
3. Troubleshooting: Questions and Answers
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
3.1. Question: How can I keep the settings through a reboot?
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Answer: Whether you are using BSD-style or SysV-style (Redhat?? for example)
|
||
init, you can always include it in /etc/rc.d/rc.local. Here's what I have on
|
||
my SysV init system (Redhat?? 3.0.3 and 4.0):
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
My /etc/rc.d/rc.local: (edited to show the relevant portions)
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
#setting up IP alias interfaces
|
||
echo "Setting 172.16.3.1, 172.16.3.10, 172.16.3.100 IP Aliases ..."
|
||
/sbin/ifconfig lo 127.0.0.1
|
||
/sbin/ifconfig eth0 up
|
||
/sbin/ifconfig eth0 172.16.3.1
|
||
/sbin/ifconfig eth0:0 172.16.3.10
|
||
/sbin/ifconfig eth0:1 172.16.3.100
|
||
#setting up the routes
|
||
echo "Setting IP routes ..."
|
||
/sbin/route add -net 127.0.0.0
|
||
/sbin/route add -net 172.16.3.0 dev eth0
|
||
/sbin/route add -host 172.16.3.1 eth0
|
||
/sbin/route add -host 172.16.3.10 eth0:0
|
||
/sbin/route add -host 172.16.3.100 eth0:1
|
||
/sbin/route add default gw 172.16.3.200
|
||
#
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
3.2. Question: How do I set up the IP aliased machine to receive e-mail on
|
||
the various aliased IP addresses (on a machine using sendmail)?
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Answer: Create (if it doesn't already exist) a file called, /etc/
|
||
mynames.cw,for example. The file does not have to be this exact name nor in
|
||
the /etc directory.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
In that file, place the official domain names of the aliased IP addresses. If
|
||
these aliased IP addresses do not have a domain name, then you can place the
|
||
IP address itself.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
The /etc/mynames.cw might look like this:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
# /etc/mynames.cw - include all aliases for your machine here; # is a comment
|
||
domain.one.net
|
||
domain.two.com
|
||
domain.three.org
|
||
4.5.6.7
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
In your sendmail.cf file, where it defines a file class macro Fw, add the
|
||
following:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
##################
|
||
# local info #
|
||
##################
|
||
|
||
# file containing names of hosts for which we receive email
|
||
Fw/etc/mynames.cw
|
||
|
||
That should do it. Test out the new setting by invoking sendmail in test
|
||
mode. The following is an example:
|
||
ganymede$ /usr/lib/sendmail -bt
|
||
ADDRESS TEST MODE (ruleset 3 NOT automatically invoked)
|
||
Enter < ruleset> < address>
|
||
> 0 me@4.5.6.7
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 0 input: me @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 7
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 98 input: me @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 7
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 98 returns: me @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 7
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 97 input: me @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 7
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 3 input: me @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 7
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 96 input: me < @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 7 >
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 96 returns: me < @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 7 . >
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 3 returns: me < @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 7 . >
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 0 input: me < @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 7 . >
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 98 input: me < @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 7 . >
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 98 returns: me < @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 7 . >
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 0 returns: $# local $: me
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 97 returns: $# local $: me
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 0 returns: $# local $: me
|
||
> 0 me@4.5.6.8
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 0 input: me @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 8
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 98 input: me @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 8
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 98 returns: me @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 8
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 97 input: me @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 8
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 3 input: me @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 8
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 96 input: me < @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 8 >
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 96 returns: me < @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 8 >
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 3 returns: me < @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 8 >
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 0 input: me < @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 8 >
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 98 input: me < @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 8 >
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 98 returns: me < @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 8 >
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 95 input: < > me < @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 8 >
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 95 returns: me < @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 8 >
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 0 returns: $# smtp $@ 4 . 5 . 6 . 8 $: me < @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 8 >
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 97 returns: $# smtp $@ 4 . 5 . 6 . 8 $: me < @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 8 >
|
||
rewrite: ruleset 0 returns: $# smtp $@ 4 . 5 . 6 . 8 $: me < @ 4 . 5 . 6 . 8 >
|
||
>
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Notice when I tested me@4.5.6.7, it delivered the mail to the local machine,
|
||
while me@4.5.6.8 was handed off to the smtp mailer. That is the correct
|
||
response.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
3.3. Question: How do I delete an alias?
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Answer: To delete an alias you simply add a `-' to the end of its name and
|
||
refer to it and is as simple as:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<screen>
|
||
root# ifconfig eth0:0- 0
|
||
</screen>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
All routes associated with that alias will also be deleted
|
||
automatically.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
You are all set now.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="IP-Aliasing">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="Multicasting">
|
||
|
||
<title>Multicasting</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
* Multicast HOWTO
|
||
|
||
A good page providing comparisons between reliable multicast protocols
|
||
is
|
||
|
||
<http://www.tascnets.com/mist/doc/mcpCompare.html>.
|
||
|
||
A very good and up-to-date site, with lots of interesting links
|
||
(Internet drafts, RFCs, papers, links to other sites) is:
|
||
|
||
<http://research.ivv.nasa.gov/RMP/links.html>.
|
||
|
||
<http://hill.lut.ac.uk/DS-Archive/MTP.html> is also a good source of
|
||
information on the subject.
|
||
|
||
Katia Obraczka's "Multicast Transport Protocols: A Survey and
|
||
Taxonomy" article gives short descriptions for each protocol and tries
|
||
to classify them according to different features. You can read it in
|
||
the IEEE Communications magazine, January 1998, vol. 36, No. 1.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
10. References.
|
||
|
||
10.1. RFCs.
|
||
|
||
|
||
o RFC 1112 "Host Extensions for IP Multicasting". Steve Deering.
|
||
August 1989.
|
||
|
||
o RFC 2236 "Internet Group Management Protocol, version 2". W.
|
||
Fenner. November 1997.
|
||
|
||
o RFC 1458 "Requirements for Multicast Protocols". Braudes, R and
|
||
Zabele, S. May 1993.
|
||
|
||
o RFC 1469 "IP Multicast over Token-Ring Local Area Networks". T.
|
||
Pusateri. June 1993.
|
||
|
||
o RFC 1390 "Transmission of IP and ARP over FDDI Networks". D. Katz.
|
||
January 1993.
|
||
|
||
o RFC 1583 "OSPF Version 2". John Moy. March 1994.
|
||
|
||
o RFC 1584 "Multicast Extensions to OSPF". John Moy. March 1994.
|
||
|
||
o RFC 1585 "MOSPF: Analysis and Experience". John Moy. March 1994.
|
||
|
||
o RFC 1812 "Requirements for IP version 4 Routers". Fred Baker,
|
||
Editor. June 1995
|
||
|
||
o RFC 2117 "Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM):
|
||
Protocol Specification". D. Estrin, D. Farinacci, A. Helmy, D.
|
||
Thaler; S. Deering, M. Handley, V. Jacobson, C. Liu, P. Sharma, and
|
||
L. Wei. July 1997.
|
||
|
||
o RFC 2189 "Core Based Trees (CBT version 2) Multicast Routing". A.
|
||
Ballardie. September 1997.
|
||
|
||
o RFC 2201 "Core Based Trees (CBT) Multicast Routing Architecture".
|
||
A. Ballardie. September 1997.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
10.2. Internet Drafts.
|
||
|
||
|
||
o "Introduction to IP Multicast Routing". draft-ietf-mboned-intro-
|
||
multicast- 03.txt. T. Maufer, C. Semeria. July 1997.
|
||
|
||
o "Administratively Scoped IP Multicast". draft-ietf-mboned-admin-ip-
|
||
space-03.txt. D. Meyer. June 10, 1997.
|
||
|
||
10.3. Web pages.
|
||
|
||
|
||
o Linux Multicast Homepage.
|
||
<http://www.cs.virginia.edu/~mke2e/multicast.html>
|
||
|
||
o Linux Multicast FAQ. <http://andrew.triumf.ca/pub/linux/multicast-
|
||
FAQ>
|
||
|
||
o Multicast and MBONE on Linux.
|
||
<http://www.teksouth.com/linux/multicast/>
|
||
|
||
o Christian Daudt's MBONE-Linux Page.
|
||
<http://www.microplex.com/~csd/linux/mbone.html>
|
||
|
||
o Reliable Multicast Links
|
||
<http://research.ivv.nasa.gov/RMP/links.html>
|
||
|
||
o Multicast Transport Protocols <http://hill.lut.ac.uk/DS-
|
||
Archive/MTP.html>
|
||
|
||
10.4. Books.
|
||
|
||
o "TCP/IP Illustrated: Volume 1 The Protocols". Stevens, W. Richard.
|
||
Addison Wesley Publishing Company, Reading MA, 1994
|
||
|
||
o "TCP/IP Illustrated: Volume 2, The Implementation". Wright, Gary
|
||
and W. Richard Stevens. Addison Wesley Publishing Company, Reading
|
||
MA, 1995
|
||
|
||
o "UNIX Network Programming Volume 1. Networking APIs: Sockets and
|
||
XTI". Stevens, W. Richard. Second Edition, Prentice Hall, Inc.
|
||
1998.
|
||
|
||
o "Internetworking with TCP/IP Volume 1 Principles, Protocols, and
|
||
Architecture". Comer, Douglas E. Second Edition, Prentice Hall,
|
||
Inc. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1991
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="Multicast">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="Network-Management">
|
||
|
||
<title>Network-Management</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
There is an impressive number of tools focused on network management
|
||
and remote administration under Linux. Some interesting remote administration
|
||
projects are linuxconf and webmin:
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
<EFBFBD> Webmin <http://www.webmin.com/webmin/>
|
||
<EFBFBD> Linuxconf <http://www.solucorp.qc.ca/linuxconf/>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Other tools include network traffic analysis tools, network security
|
||
tools, monitoring tools, configuration tools, etc. An archive of many
|
||
of these tools may be found at Metalab
|
||
<http://www.metalab.unc.edu/pub/Linux/system/network/>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
9.2. SNMP
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
The Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol for Internet
|
||
network management services. It allows for remote monitoring and
|
||
configuration of routers, bridges, network cards, switches, etc...
|
||
There is a large amount of libraries, clients, daemons and SNMP based
|
||
monitoring programs available for Linux. A good page dealing with SNMP
|
||
and Linux software may be found at : http://linas.org/linux/NMS.html
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
10. Enterprise Linux Networking
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
In certain situations it is necessary for the networking
|
||
infrastructure to have proper mechanisms to guarantee network
|
||
availability nearly 100% of the time. Some related techniques are
|
||
described in the following sections. Most of the following material
|
||
can be found at the excellent Linas website:
|
||
http://linas.org/linux/index.html and in the Linux High-Availability
|
||
HOWTO <http://metalab.unc.edu/pub/Linux/ALPHA/linux-ha/High-
|
||
Availability-HOWTO.html>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
10.1. High Availability
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Redundancy is used to prevent the overall IT system from having single
|
||
points of failure. A server with only one network card or a single
|
||
SCSI disk has two single points of failure. The objective is to mask
|
||
unplanned outages from users in a manner that lets users continue to
|
||
work quickly. High availability software is a set of scripts and tools
|
||
that automatically monitor and detect failures, taking the appropriate
|
||
steps to restore normal operation and to notifying system
|
||
administrators.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="Networking-Management">
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="Redundant-Networking">
|
||
|
||
<title>Redundant-Networking</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
IP Address Takeover (IPAT). When a network adapter card fails, its IP
|
||
address should be taken by a working network card in the same node or
|
||
in another node. MAC Address Takeover: when an IP takeover occurs, it
|
||
should be made sure that all the nodes in the network update their ARP
|
||
caches (the mapping between IP and MAC addresses).
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
See the High-Availability HOWTO for more details:
|
||
http://metalab.unc.edu/pub/Linux/ALPHA/linux-ha/High-Availability-
|
||
HOWTO.html
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect1 id="Redundant-Networking">
|
||
|
||
10.3. Redundant networking
|
||
|
||
IP Address Takeover (IPAT). When a network adapter card fails, its IP
|
||
address should be taken by a working network card in the same node or
|
||
in another node. MAC Address Takeover: when an IP takeover occurs, it
|
||
should be made sure that all the nodes in the network update their ARP
|
||
caches (the mapping between IP and MAC addresses).
|
||
|
||
See the High-Availability HOWTO for more details:
|
||
http://metalab.unc.edu/pub/Linux/ALPHA/linux-ha/High-Availability-
|
||
HOWTO.html
|
||
|
||
|
||
|